Developing Musicianship Through Aural Skills: A Holistic Approach to Sight Singing and Ear Training

Citation preview

DAS00c.qxd

8/1/10

13:52

Page i

Developing Musicianship through Aural Skills

Developing Musicianship through Aural Skills is a comprehensive method for learning to hear, sing, understand, and use the foundations of music as a part of an integrated and holistic curriculum for training professional musicians. Each chapter is organized to take advantage of how our minds and instincts naturally hear and understand music, and presents a variety of exercises for practicing and integrating the structure into your musical vocabulary. Developing Musicianship through Aural Skills will provide you with the musical terms, progressions, resolutions, and devices that you will be able to draw upon as a functional and usable musical vocabulary. Ear training exercises on the companion website reinforce both discrete structures (intervals, chords, etc.) as well as all rhythmic and melodic material, and sections are provided to open discussion and reflection on the skills and attitudes professional musicians need to be successful. Features: Easy to Understand Explanations: Topics are logically ordered and explained to help the student make connections to their theory instruction and common usage. A Complete Method: Detailed instructions are given for singing and hearing structures as they most commonly appear in music, providing students with a proven, reliable process for creating and discerning musical structures. Exercises: Ideas for drill, pitch patterns, rhythms, melodies, duets, self-accompanied melodies, and examples from the literature help the student to integrate each chapter’s material. Reflections: Discussions of topics that help students to develop as a person, a professional, and an artist, and to integrate aural skills into their musical education. Ear Training Tools and Video Demonstrations can be found on the companion website. Kent D. Cleland is Associate Professor and Chair of the Department of Music Theory at the BaldwinWallace College Conservatory of Music. He holds degrees from Ohio University, Indiana University, and the University of Cincinnati, and he has taught at the University of Cincinnati and Oberlin College. Mary Dobrea-Grindahl holds the Diplôme Jaques-Dalcroze from the Institute Jaques-Dalcroze in Geneva, Switzerland. She is Associate Professor of Piano and Chair of the Keyboard Department at the Baldwin-Wallace College Conservatory of Music, where she teaches private piano, pedagogy, Eurhythmics, and solfège.

DAS00c.qxd

8/1/10

13:52

Page ii

DAS00c.qxd

8/1/10

13:52

Page iii

Developing Musicianship through Aural Skills A Holistic Approach to Sight Singing and Ear Training

Kent D. Cleland and Mary Dobrea-Grindahl

Please visit the companion website at www.routledge.com/textbooks/developingmusicianship

Senior Editor: Constance Ditzel Senior Development Editor: Nicole Solano Senior Editorial Assistant: Denny Tek Production Editor: Sarah Stone Project Manager: Maggie Lindsey-Jones, Keystroke Marketing Manager: Chris Bowers Text Design: Karl Hunt, Keystroke Copy Editor: Ruth Jeavons Proofreader: Ann King Cover Designer: Jayne Varney Composition: Keystroke Companion Website Designer: Leon Nolan, Jr. First published 2010 by Routledge 270 Madison Ave, New York, NY 10016 Simultaneously published in the UK by Routledge 2 Park Square, Milton Park, Abingdon, Oxon OX14 4RN Routledge is an imprint of the Taylor & Francis Group, an informa business This edition published in the Taylor & Francis e-Library, 2010. To purchase your own copy of this or any of Taylor & Francis or Routledge’s collection of thousands of eBooks please go to www.eBookstore.tandf.co.uk. © 2010 Taylor & Francis All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reprinted or reproduced or utilised in any form or by any electronic, mechanical, or other means, now known or hereafter invented, including photocopying and recording, or in any information storage or retrieval system, without permission in writing from the publishers. Trademark Notice: Product or corporate names may be trademarks or registered trademarks, and are used only for identification and explanation without intent to infringe. Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Cleland, Kent D. Developing musicianship through aural skills : a holisitic approach to sight singing and ear training / Kent D. Cleland. – 1st ed. p. cm. 1. Sight-singing. 2. Ear training. I. Dobrea-Grindahl, Mary. II. Title. MT870.C58 2010 ISBN 0-203-86156-6 Master e-book ISBN

ISBN10: 0–415–80243–1 (hbk) ISBN10: 0–415–80244–X (pbk) ISBN10: 0–203–86156–6 (ebk) ISBN13: 978–0–415–80243–7 (hbk) ISBN13: 978–0–415–80244–4 (pbk) ISBN13: 978–0–203–86156–1 (ebk)

DAS00c.qxd

8/1/10

13:52

Page v

For Eric Karen, Larkin, and Chloe Our families, for their love and patience. To Larry Hartzell and Allyn Reilly, colleagues, mentors and friends. To our students, from whom we have learned so much.

DAS00c.qxd

8/1/10

13:52

Page vi

DAS00c.qxd

8/1/10

13:52

Page vii

Contents

Preface Chapter 1 Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases; The Major Mode, Major Triads and Tonic Function Rhythm

Reading Scales Intervals

Chords Harmony Ideas

1.1 Beats, their First Divisions and Multiples, and Simple Meters 1.2 Second Division and Second Multiple of the Beat in Simple Meter 1.3 Rests 1.4 The Phrase 1.5 Treble and Bass Clefs 1.6 Major Scales and Major Scale Degrees 1.7 Major and Minor Seconds 1.8 Major and Minor Thirds 1.9 Perfect Fifths and Octaves 1.10 Major Triads in Root Position 1.11 Improvisation I: Tonic Function 1.12 Music from the Literature Reflections: Why Study Solfège? 1.13 Dictation Materials

Chapter 2 Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode and Inverted Triads Rhythm Scales Intervals Chords

Ideas

2.1 Compound Meters 2.2 Ties and Dotted Rhythms in Simple Meter 2.3 Minor Scales and Minor Scale Degrees 2.4 Perfect Fourths 2.5 Major and Minor Sixths 2.6 Minor Triads in Root Position 2.7 Major and Minor Triads in Inversion 2.8 Music from the Literature Reflections: Professionalism 2.9 Dictation Materials

xi

1 1 8 15 20 25 29 36 46 56 65 73 78 83 84 88 88 95 102 111 119 128 136 144 149 150

DAS00c.qxd

8/1/10

13:52

viii

Page viii

Contents

Chapter 3 Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound Rhythm Intervals Chords Harmony Ideas

3.1 Changing Meter I: Simple Changing Meter 3.2 Second Division of the Beat in Compound Meter 3.3 Minor Sevenths and Tritones 3.4 Dominant Seventh Chords 3.5 Diminished Triads 3.6 Improvisation II: Dominant Function 3.7 Music from the Literature Reflections: Musicality 3.8 Dictation Materials

Chapter 4 Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function Rhythm Intervals

4.1 Irregular Divisions I: Triplets and Duplets 4.2 Major Sevenths 4.3 Compound Intervals Chords 4.4 Major-Major and Minor-Minor Seventh Chords 4.5 Diminished Seventh Chords Harmony 4.6 Improvisation III: Predominant Function 4.7 Music from the Literature Ideas Reflections: Listening 4.8 Dictation Materials Chapter 5 Less Common Meters; C Clefs and Harmonic Progression Rhythm Reading Harmony

5.1 Less Common Simple and Compound Meters 5.2 Reading the Alto and Tenor Clefs 5.3 Harmonic Progressions 5.4 Frequently Used Progressions 5.5 Improvising Melodies Over Harmonic Progressions 5.6 Progressions for Arpeggiation and Improvisation Ideas Reflections: Perseverance 5.7 Dictation Materials

Chapter 6 Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism Rhythm Scales Harmony

6.1 Syncopation 6.2 The Chromatic Scale and Surface Chromaticism 6.3 Modal Mixture 6.4 Music from the Literature Ideas Reflections: Creativity 6.5 Dictation Materials

155 155 160 166 175 184 193 199 204 204 210 210 220 228 235 245 254 261 264 265 270 270 275 282 283 286 287 288 289 293 293 301 310 318 321 322

DAS00c.qxd

8/1/10

13:52

Page ix

Contents

Chapter 7 Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism Rhythm Harmony

7.1 Irregular Divisions II: Triplets and Duplets in Augmentation and Diminution 7.2 Secondary Dominants and Leading Tone Chords 7.3 The Neapolitan Chord 7.4 Augmented Sixth Chords 7.5 Extended and Altered Dominant Chords 7.6 Music from the Literature Ideas Reflections: Confidence 7.7 Dictation Materials

Chapter 8 Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation Rhythm Reading Harmony

ix

327 327 335 347 355 363 371 375 376 382

8.1 Divisions of the Beat into Numbers Greater than Four 8.2 Reading in Other Clefs 8.3 Modulation to Closely Related Keys 8.4 Diatonic Modulation to Distantly Related Keys 8.5 Music from the Literature Ideas Reflections: Performance Preparation 8.6 Dictation Materials

382 388 390 401 412 415 416

Chapter 9 Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

419

Rhythm Harmony

9.1 Reading Complex Rhythms 9.2 Direct, Chromatic, and Enharmonic Modulation 9.3 Rapidly Shifting and Unexpected Tonalities 9.4 Music from the Literature Ideas Reflections: Energy, Space, and Time 9.5 Dictation Materials

Chapter 10 Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques Rhythm 10.1 Changing Meter II: Complex Changing Meter 10.2 Polyrhythms 10.3 Asymmetric Meters Ideas Reflections: Understanding and Appreciating Twentieth-century Music 10.4 Dictation Materials Chapter 11 Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models Scales 11.1 11.2 11.3 Harmony 11.4 11.5 11.6

Pentatonic and Blues Scales The Ecclesiastic Modes Other Scales Polytonality and Polymodality Music from the Literature Non-Western Music from the Literature

419 423 436 442 445 447 450 450 458 467 472 473 478 478 487 495 503 508 511

DAS00c.qxd

8/1/10

13:52

Page x

x

Contents

Ideas Reflections: Being an Advocate for Music 11.7 Dictation Materials

518 518

Chapter 12 Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

522

Scales 12.1 Whole-tone, Octatonic, and Other Non-Tonal Scales Harmony 12.2 Atonality 12.3 Atonal Trichords and Manipulating Atonal Sets 12.4 Larger Atonal Sets and Serial Music 12.5 Music from the Literature Ideas Reflections: A Life of Solfège 12.6 Dictation Materials

522 530 538 547 553 559 560

Appendices Appendix A Glossary of Musical Terms Appendix B Syllable Systems Appendix C Using Your Voice

563 567 570

Index of Musical Examples

572

DAS00c.qxd

8/1/10

13:52

Page xi

Preface

Developing Musicianship through Aural Skills is a comprehensive method for learning to hear, sing, understand, and use the basic materials of music. Aural skills are an essential part of every musician’s education. Just as authors need to be readers and artists need to have a discerning eye, musicians must have a developed musical ear. This allows us to understand the language we use in our careers on a musical and aesthetic level, and converse with other musicians both about and through music. Having a trained musical ear includes the ability to discriminate between different types of musical sounds, to sense and understand their natural tendencies, and to effectively translate these tendencies into performance. Aural skills are the ability to hear what you see and to see what you hear, and to communicate about and through music. After studying aural skills, you should have a mental catalog of standard musical progressions, terms, resolutions, and devices that you will be able to draw upon as a functional and usable musical vocabulary.

How to Use this Text This text is based on the premise that whenever we hear a musical sound, we 1) identify a tonal center, 2) hear that musical sound in relation to that tonal center, and 3) place a label on that sound. Musical sounds are heard and understood as combinations of scale degrees in a key. Each chapter is organized to take advantage of how our minds naturally hear and understand music. Each chapter begins with “Facts You Should Know”: a listing of theoretical and practical information about that structure that helps you develop the vocabulary to place the correct label on the sounds you hear. The “facts” describe the characteristics of the structure and give information about how that sound most commonly appears in tonal music. Look for the “flag up” icon as each topic is introduced. Next, detailed instructions are given about how to hear that particular sound as it commonly appears in tonal music. In most cases, pitched structures are presented as combinations of scale degrees in the major mode. Rhythmic structures are presented as they commonly appear in metric and tonal music. Look for the “hearing” icon. Detailed instructions are then given for singing the structure both outside of a melodic context and as it most commonly appears melodically. Look for the “singing” icon.

DAS00c.qxd

8/1/10

xii

13:52

Page xii

Preface

Each chapter provides a variety of exercises for practicing and integrating the structure into your musical vocabulary: “Assignments for Practice” give some ideas for becoming more familiar and comfortable with the chapter’s subject. Most chapters on pitched materials also contain pitch patterns—patterns of scale degrees that include the chapter’s topic sound embedded within them. The method this book uses stresses the singing and recognition of scale degrees as the most accurate and reliable way to hear and sing musical structures; thus, these exercises give practice in hearing and singing structures as scale degrees. These are to be sung in an isorhythmic manner, utilizing a given rhythmic figure. The student should sing the pattern in the given rhythm until he or she can find a logical and intuitive way to cadence. Next come a series of melodies, duets, self-accompanied melodies, and examples from the literature that feature the chapter’s topic structure as it most commonly appears and in other contexts. Several chapters focus on improvisation through recognizing harmonic function. Some melodies throughout the text contain blank measures in which the student is expected to improvise a logical and appropriate musical figure. The text is organized into twelve units, each of which should take approximately five weeks for an average undergraduate class to cover. Each unit contains a variety of topics with their own exercises, followed by integrating examples from the literature. The units move from basic, diatonic material, through chromatic material, and into twentieth-century and atonal material, providing a variety of strategies for how to deal with music that doesn’t adhere to tonal expectations. This text’s companion website is an important tool for learning and practicing the material in the text. Look for materials to practice identifying and writing each structure both out of context and within melodies and harmonic progressions. Additional practice melodies are included for most structures, as are videos of students demonstrating this text’s method for performing each topic. Look for the “website” icon throughout the text. You can find the companion website at: www.routledge.com/textbooks/ developingmusicianship. Visit the website for additional rhythms for this topic. Because becoming a professional musician requires the ability to integrate aural skills throughout your education, each unit discusses topics related to developing as a person, a professional, and an artist. Let those chapters become a starting point for your development as a whole musician, and for living a rich life in music. Together with its companion website, Developing Aural Skills is designed to start you on a path of discovery about how you hear, understand, and learn music while developing as an artist. The study of aural skills is a lifelong pursuit, and learning to approach it methodically and with artistry, passion, and joy is essential for your continued development as a musician. Read, learn, sing, and enjoy speaking the language of music. We would like to express our appreciation to all of the people at Routledge who helped to make this project a reality, including Constance Ditzel for her belief in the book from the beginning, Nicole Solano, Denny Tek, Sarah Stone, Chris Bowers, and Jayne Varney - thank you. Without their patience, guidance, and wisdom, this project would still be just an idea. We would also like to thank the project management team at Keystroke including, Maggie Lindsey-Jones, Ruth Jeavons, Ann King, Karl Hunt and Emma Wood.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 1

Chapter 1

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases; The Major Mode, Major Triads and Tonic Function 1.1 Beats, their First Divisons and Multiples, and Simple Meters Note Values

Facts You Need to Know Durational values are indicated using a system of visual symbols that show the relationships of notes to each other. Rhythmic values are set up in a binary numeric system, which means that each value is equal to one half of the next larger value and twice the next smallest value. The following symbols are the standard note durations: the system continues indefinitely, with each successively smaller note value adding one flag (or beam) and being one half of the next larger value and twice the next smallest value. EXAMPLE 1.1.1

Note Value

Note Name

Equivalent Rest

Double Whole Note or Breve Whole Note or

Half Note

or

Quarter Note

or

Eighth Note

or

Sixteenth Note

or

Thirty-second Note

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 2

2

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

Simple Beats

Facts You Need to Know The fundamental rhythmic structure of Western music composed between 1600 and 1900 is based on what we refer to as a beat or pulse, that is, a steady, continuous unit of time that occurs at regular intervals. The frequency at which we perceive a beat to recur is the tempo. We recognize beats instinctively; even young children are able to listen to a piece of music and clap along with its basic rhythmic impulse. Beats are divisible into any number of smaller units, most commonly into groups of two or three. When a beat is divided into two parts, we refer to it as a simple beat or simple beat structure. Simple beats produce a two-to-one relationship between rhythmic values; this is true whether you are dealing with the first division of the beat (twice as fast, or the diminution of the beat) or the first multiple of the beat (twice as slow, or the augmentation of the beat). Refer to the chart below:

EXAMPLE 1.1.2

Simple Meters

Facts You Need to Know Meter is created when beats organize themselves into recurring units, the most common of which are groups of two, three, or four. Groups of beats are organized into measures, delineated by a vertical line (called a bar line) at the end of each grouping. Meters are created and perceived through the interaction of several elements, including harmonic usage, tempo, melodic contour, and articulation. Meters are defined by two characteristics: the number of beats in a measure, and the number of divisions in each beat. A measure with two beats is a duple meter, with three beats, a triple meter, and with four beats, a quadruple meter. A measure in which the beats are divided into two parts is a simple meter. For example, a meter with two simple beats is a simple duple meter. When we listen to music, we tend to define our listening experience by the number of beats we hear; we might say, “Oh, this is in a meter of four,” whereas when we read music, the meter is indicated with a time signature, the numeric symbol found at the beginning of a work. The top number of a time

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 3

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

3

signature indicates the number of beats in a measure and, in simple meters, the bottom number indicates what kind of note gets a beat.

The three tables below show examples of simple duple, triple, and quadruple meters. Notice that in each example, there is a two-to-one relationship between the beat note and its division. Simple Duple Meters EXAMPLE 1.1.3

Time Signature

Beat Note Value

Beat Division

Beats per Measure 2

or

c

2 2

Or, as notated: EXAMPLE 1.1.4

division

beat

Simple Quadruple Meters EXAMPLE 1.1.5

Time Signature or

Beat Note Value

c

Beat Division

Beats per Measure 4 4 4

Or, as notated:

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 4

4

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

EXAMPLE 1.1.6

division

beat

Duple and quadruple meters are very closely related; at times, it can be nearly impossible to ascertain whether a piece is written in duple or quadruple meter. This is because quadruple meters divide themselves naturally into two parts, and have a secondary stress on the third beat of the measure. Simple Triple Meters EXAMPLE 1.1.7

Time Signature

Beat Note Value

Beat Division

Beats per Measure 3 3 3

Or, as notated: EXAMPLE 1.1.8

division

beat

The elements of rhythm, harmony, melody, tempo, and articulation all combine to create meter; the character of a meter is built into the music. The stress we hear at the beginning of a measure happens because of the way these elements interact, not because one note is played louder than the others every two, three, or four beats. Just as every interval has a distinct quality of sound, each meter has a different personality. Even a simple rhythm takes on a different meaning depending on whether it is in a duple, triple, or quadruple meter. Look at the short–short–long rhythm below; conduct and articulate each measure, and notice how the character of the rhythm changes from meter to meter. EXAMPLE 1.1.9

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 5

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

5

The rhythm above completely fills the measure, so it has a natural sense of cadence, but not a sense of breadth. EXAMPLE 1.1.10

The rhythm above has a strong sense of suspension because it does not divide naturally into two parts in this meter; the short notes lead to the long note in dramatic fashion. EXAMPLE 1.1.11

In the rhythm above, the pattern has more weight because the meter itself, with more beats, has more breadth.

Rhythm Reading Reading Rhythms in Simple Duple Meter The exercises below use the beat and its first division and multiple in simple duple and quadruple meter. Practice each in two ways: first by clapping the beat while articulating the rhythm (using a neutral syllable like “ta”), then by conducting and articulating. Use a variety of tempi and dynamics. Two of the most common patterns in simple duple and quadruple meters are “short–short–long” and “long–short–short.” Find and circle other occurrences of those patterns in the rhythms below; learning to “see” music in groups helps you develop your sight-reading skills. RHYTHM 1.1.1

short

short

long

long

short

short

RHYTHM 1.1.2

short short long

short short long

long

short short

long

short short

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 6

6

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

RHYTHM 1.1.3

With energy

RHYTHM 1.1.4

Allegro

RHYTHM 1.1.5

Very fast

RHYTHM 1.1.6

Moderato

The rhythm below uses notes placed on various lines and spaces of the staff. Focus on reading only the rhythm.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 7

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

7

RHYTHM 1.1.7

Allegro

Reading in Simple Triple Meter When reading rhythms in simple triple meter, work to “see” the entire measure at once, rather than reading beat by beat. RHYTHM 1.1.8

RHYTHM 1.1.9

RHYTHM 1.1.10

RHYTHM 1.1.11

Allegro molto

RHYTHM 1.1.12

Allegro moderato

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 8

8

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

Two-part Rhythms Practice each part individually, then put them together by clapping the bottom voice while articulating the top voice on a neutral syllable like “ta”. You may also try tapping the two parts with your hands, making sure each voice has a different sound. Finally, you may work with a friend to perform these.

TWO-PART RHYTHM 1.1.1

TWO-PART RHYTHM 1.1.2

Three-part Rhythm Learn to scan the entire score from the bottom voice up. Perform them using three different sounds (for example, clapping, tapping, and articulating) or with one or two friends. THREE-PART RHYTHM 1.1.1

Andante

1.2 Second Division and Second Multiple of the Beat in Simple Meter As you know, simple beats are binary structures because they divide and multiply naturally by two, resulting in a 2:1 relationship between manifestations of the beat. When beats are divided or multiplied twice, the result is the second division (subdivision) or second multiple of the beat. Utilizing second division or multiple results in a 4:1 relationship to the original beat. Refer to the charts opposite:

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 9

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

EXAMPLE 1.2.1

Beat Note

9

EXAMPLE 1.2.2

First Division (2:1)

Second Division (Subdivision) (4:1)

Beat Note

First Multiple (1:2)

Second Multiple (1:4)

When the second division of the beat is employed, the rhythmic complexity of a piece seems to increase significantly. That complexity, however, may be more a visual phenomenon than an actual one, since at its most fundamental level, the 2:1 relationship between note values still exists. (For example, two eighth notes equal a quarter note; similarly, two sixteenths equal an eighth—the relationship between note values is the same.) In order to be both accurate and musical when reading rhythms, use a consistent, trustworthy process, just as you do when singing intervals or other musical structures. Count eighth notes with +s, like this: EXAMPLE 1.2.3

1 +2 +

1+2+

1 + 2 +

(Say "and" on the "+" symbol.)

The most traditional means of counting rhythms that use the second division of the beat is to add the sounds “e” and “a” to represent each part of the beat, as shown below. Notice that the “+” at the midway point of the beat is still intact. Another way to count subdivisions is to use numbers, which is less cumbersome and more precise: EXAMPLE 1.2.4

or 1 e + a 2 e + a 12341234

1e+a2e+a 12341234

1 e +a 2 e +a 12 34 12 34

If you can feel the relationship of an eighth note to a quarter note, you can figure out a rhythm by maintaining an eighth-note pulse and relying on the two-to-one relationship, like this:

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 10

10

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

EXAMPLE 1.2.5

1

+

2

+

1 + 2 +

1

+

2

+

Any of the above methods can be used when reading patterns in simple meter, as shown below: EXAMPLE 1.2.6

1 e + (a)2 e + (a)

1 2 3(4)1 2 3 (4)

1

1(e) + a 2 (e) + a

1(2) 3 4 1(2) 3 4

1

+

+

2

2

+

+

Assignments for Practice As before, practice each rhythm below by clapping the beat and articulating the rhythm. RHYTHM 1.2.1

Moderato

RHYTHM 1.2.2

Vivace

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 11

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

RHYTHM 1.2.3

Adagio

RHYTHM 1.2.4

Lent o

espressivo

rit.

RHYTHM 1.2.5

Presto

RHYTHM 1.2.6

Andante

11

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 12

12

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

RHYTHM 1.2.7

Lent o

cantabile

rit.

RHYTHM 1.2.8

Briskly

RHYTHM 1.2.9

Slowly and sadly

RHYTHM 1.2.10

Andante

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 13

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

13

RHYTHM 1.2.11

Moderato

rit.

RHYTHM 1.2.12

Moderato

dim.

Two-part Rhythms TWO-PART RHYTHM 1.2.1

Andante

TWO-PART RHYTHM 1.2.2

Allegretto

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 14

14

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

TWO-PART RHYTHM 1.2.3

Presto

lightly

Three-part Rhythm THREE-PART RHYTHM 1.2

Allegro

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 15

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

15

1.3 Rests Facts You Need to Know Rests are symbols used to indicate silence in music; every note value has a corresponding rest, as indicated in the chart below: EXAMPLE 1.3.1

Double Whole Note and Rest

Whole Note and Rest

Quarter Notes and Rest

Eighth Notes and Rest

Half Notes and Rest

Sixteenth Notes and Rest

Just as we add an additional flag for each smaller note value from the eighth note on, we add an additional "flag" on each successively smaller rest value. The exception to this rule is the whole rest: in addition to being equal to a whole note, it can also indicate a silence that lasts through an entire measure, regardless of the number of beats in it. On their most complex level, rests are musical entities that help to give music space, influence phrasing, create drama, provide rhythmic energy, wreak havoc with metric impulses, add humor, or create ambiguity in music.

Reading Rests

To read rests accurately and fluently, learn to listen to and internalize the duration of the silence. Recognize that: 1. Reading rests requires you to become knowledgeable and comfortable with the way rests are notated on the printed page. In particular, eighth-note (and smaller value) rests can “fool” the eye. The first measure of the illustration below shows rests on the second half of each beat; the second measure shows rests placed on the beat. Whether flagged or beamed, the two examples look very similar. Thus, it is necessary to define the difference between the two. EXAMPLE 1.3.2

2. By rule, the way rests are notated in order to delineate metric structure can confuse the eye. In the example below, there are two eighth-note rests in succession rather than a quarter note because the

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 16

16

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

eighth notes belong to different beats. Always take time to determine where the beats fall in order to ensure reading accuracy. EXAMPLE 1.3.3

3. To overcome the natural tendency to rush rests in performance, practice two ways: Use a metronome during practice. (Remember, the metronome is an aid to practice—a means to an end and not an end in itself—so always repeat the exercise without the metronome.) You can also learn to avoid rushing through rests by adding a sound when you practice. A clap, “tongue-click” or sniff during a rest helps inhibit the desire to rush. As with metronome practice, always repeat this technique practicing without the claps while focusing on “hearing” the silence in your inner ear. EXAMPLE 1.3.4

1 clap clap and

1 clap clap and

1

Rhythms Determine whether the rests are on the beat or the division of the beat before you begin each rhythm. Perform these in two ways: clapping the beat and articulating the rhythm, and articulating the rhythm and clapping the rests. RHYTHM 1.3.1

Allegretto

RHYTHM 1.3.2

Animato

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 17

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

RHYTHM 1.3.3

RHYTHM 1.3.4

Vi f

RHYTHM 1.3.5

Quickly, with precision

RHYTHM 1.3.6

Vivace

17

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 18

18

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

RHYTHM 1.3.7

Mässig

RHYTHM 1.3.8

With humor

Pay attention to articulation in the following rhythm. RHYTHM 1.3.9

RHYTHM 1.3.10

Lebhaft

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 19

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

RHYTHM 1.3.11

Sharply, very fast

Two-part Rhythms TWO-PART RHYTHM 1.3.1

Adagio

TWO-PART RHYTHM 1.3.2

Comodo

TWO-PART RHYTHM 1.3.3

Modéré

19

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 20

20

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

Three-part Rhythm THREE-PART RHYTHM 1.3

1.4 The Phrase Facts You Need to Know The terms crusis, metacrusis, and anacrusis are used in two contexts: to assign a name to individual beats in a measure and to describe the three parts of a phrase. The first beat of a measure is the crusis, the last beat is the anacrusis, and any remaining beats, the metacruses (or, singular, metacrusis). A phrase is crusic if it begins on the first beat of a measure; it is anacrusic if it begins on any other beat or partial of the beat. In a phrase, the crusis is the moment of sound that has the highest amount of temporal weight; it occurs most often at the ictus of the first beat of the measure. The anacrusis is the part of the phrase that directly precedes the crusis; its length is variable. The metacrusis, the length of which is in direct proportion to the length of the anacrusis, is the entire portion of the phrase between the crusis and anacrusis.

The example opposite illustrates the three parts of the phrase:

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 21

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

21

EXAMPLE 1.4.1

Crusis Anacrusis

Metacrusis

Crusis Anacrusis

Metacrusis

Examine the beaming in m. 3 of the example; notice that although the F and E belong to the same beat, they are not beamed. Those pitches belong to different phrases, and are therefore written with flags instead of beams in order to show the phrase structure. The application of this rule of notation allows a composer to be very clear about his or her intentions. Often in music, the crusis of the measure is referred to as a “downbeat,” the anacrusis, the “upbeat.” These labels have become commonplace because of our visual perception; we see a conductor’s baton travel down to get to beat one, but ensemble members will begin to play only after the conductor’s baton changes direction; the crusic beat lifts. This idea of directionality of beats is significant when you translate its effect on music. The crusis of a measure or a phrase is a beginning; it propels sound and energy forward, so the sound needs to lift and have forward motion to create a sense of direction. The anacrusis leads to the crusis, but doesn’t have the same “explosion” of sound; it serves as a preparation for the crusis. The metacrusis takes the energy of the crusis and sustains it as it travels to the anacrusis, when the whole process begins again. One important consideration in the performance of an anacrusis is the placement of stressed and unstressed notes. Sing the well-known children’s song, “Baa Baa Black Sheep” in your head; notice that its phrase structure is crusic. Notated, it looks like this: EXAMPLE 1.4.2

Baa baa black sheep have you a - ny wool?

Yes, sir! Yes, sir! Three bags full.

Imagine “Baa Baa Black Sheep” if it were performed as if the phrase structure were anacrusic, like this: EXAMPLE 1.4.3

Baa baa black sheep have you a - ny wool?

Yes, sir! Yes, sir!Three bags full.

“Baa Baa” simply doesn’t make musical sense as an anacrusic melody. Starting on the anacrusis creates false accents, which disrupt the flow of a phrase and create unintended ambiguity in performance. It is imperative to observe the stresses that occur naturally as a result of the phrase structure.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 22

22

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

Rhythm Reading Conduct or clap as you perform these rhythms. Notice how the beaming of groups of notes helps you to understand which part of the measure is anacrusic.

RHYTHM 1.4.1

Gently

RHYTHM 1.4.2

Andantino

RHYTHM 1.4.3

Mit ausdruck

rit. Add your own dynamics and phrasing to the following rhythm: RHYTHM 1.4.4

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 23

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

RHYTHM 1.4.5

Adagio

RHYTHM 1.4.6

Con brio

RHYTHM 1.4.7

Behaglich

RHYTHM 1.4.8

Comodo

23

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 24

24

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

RHYTHM 1.4.9

Allegretto

RHYTHM 1.4.10

In one

Two-part Rhythms TWO-PART RHYTHM 1.4.1

Lente

TWO-PART RHYTHM 1.4.2

Moderato

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 25

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

Three-part Rhythm THREE-PART RHYTHM 1.4

Langsam

1.5 Treble and Bass Clefs Facts You Need to Know The primary way musical pitches are notated is through the use of staves: parallel lines onto which dots representing notes are placed to indicate relative highness or lowness. Clefs are symbols placed at the beginning of each staff to indicate the location of a particular pitch. Once one pitch is identified, you can figure out the location of all pitches. Our notational system uses three clefs: The G-clef, indicating that G4 (the G above middle C) is located on the line where the curve ends. The F-clef, indicating that F3 (the F below middle C) is located on the line where the curve begins and between the two dots. The C-clef, indicating that C4 (middle C) is located where the two arcs meet. EXAMPLE 1.5.1

G-clef

F-clef

The beginning of the The end of the curve curve and the line indicates line for G4 between the dots indicate (the G above middle C). F3 (the F below middle C).

C-clef

The line that runs between the two arcs indicates C4 (middle C).

25

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 26

26

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

Vertically, the lines denote the relative height or depth of pitches. Each line represents a third (or two notes) above the previous line, and pitches (represented by “dots” or note heads) can be placed either directly on or in the spaces between lines. Staff lines and spaces are numbered from the bottom up. EXAMPLE 1.5.2

Lines

Spaces

5 4 23 1

4 3 2 1

Ledger lines are used to indicate the location of pitches beyond the range of the five-line staff. EXAMPLE 1.5.3

Horizontally, music is read from left to right. Events happening before others appear to the left of events to the right. Regular units of time are marked using vertical barlines, and rhythmic symbols indicate the specific placement of musical events in time. When the G-clef is placed so that G4 is on the second line of the staff, it is called the treble clef. The placement of notes on the treble staff appears below: EXAMPLE 1.5.4

A3

B3

C4

D4

E4

F4

G4

A4

B4

C5

D5

E5

F5

G5

A5

B5

C6

When the F-clef is placed so that F3 is on the fourth line of the staff, it is called the bass clef. The placement of notes on the bass staff appears below: EXAMPLE 1.5.5

C2

D2

E2

F2

G2

A2

B2

C3

D3

E3

F3

G3

A3

B3

C4

D4

E4

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 27

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

27

Reading in the Treble and Bass Clefs

Begin to develop reading fluency by selecting two lines to use as “reference points” on the staff: second line G and fourth line D are good choices for the treble staff, and the second space C and fourth line F are good choices for the bass staff. By using these notes as your reference points, you can quickly figure out a note you do not recognize by relating it to one of these two lines on the staff. Scan the notes in each exercise before you begin, looking for large leaps, and relating them to your established points of reference. You will find that these exercises require enormous concentration if you are not yet fluent in reading either clef. The only way to effectively master this skill is to do it. Devote some time each day to reading clefs until you are fluent with both.

Exercises The staff you see has no clef, which means that at this moment, you can choose which clef to use for reading practice. Notice, too, that you see only stepwise motion, which means that notes will always follow an alphabetical sequence backwards or forwards. Proceed as follows: 1. Establish the tempo by clapping the beat. 2. Determine the letter name of the first pitch, based on the clef you have chosen to use. Speak the letter names of the notes, in tempo. 3. Gradually increase the tempo. In doing so, you will have less time to think and analyze, and, instead, will begin to teach yourself to simply react to what you see on the page. 4. Apply the rhythmic figure found at the end of the pitch pattern. Say the letter names in rhythm and in tempo. Work for accuracy and speed. 5. Repeat the rhythmic and pitch pattern until you arrive at a place where both rhythm and pitch create a comfortable cadence or ending. The pitch pattern that appears to the left is realized on the right. PITCH PATTERN 1.5.1 Choose Clef Treble: G A B C D G D G F A G F G D E D Bass: B C D E F B F B A C B A B F G F

Practice each of the following in both the treble and bass clefs. Make sure you spend extra time practicing your weaker clef! PITCH PATTERN 1.5.2 Choose Clef

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 28

28

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

PITCH PATTERN 1.5.3 Choose Clef

PITCH PATTERN 1.5.4 Choose Clef

PITCH PATTERN 1.5.5 Choose Clef

PITCH PATTERN 1.5.6 Choose Clef

Watch for larger leaps and ledger lines in the remaining pitch patterns. Remember to use “waypoints” to make your reading faster and more accurate. PITCH PATTERN 1.5.7 Choose Clef

PITCH PATTERN 1.5.8 Choose Clef

PITCH PATTERN 1.5.9 Choose Clef

PITCH PATTERN 1.5.10 Choose Clef

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 29

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

29

1.6 Major Scales and Major Scale Degrees Facts You Need to Know A scale is a collection of pitches from which a tonal composition is constructed. The majority of Western music composed between 1600 and 1900 utilizes either the major or minor scale. This chapter will examine the major scale. The distance between most of the pitches in a tonal scale is a major second. Two pairs of pitches, however, are separated by a minor second: scale degrees 3 to 4 and 7 to 1. EXAMPLE 1.6.1

m2

D

Do 1

Re 2

Mi 3

m2

Fa 4

Sol 5

La 6

Ti 7

Do 1

Minor seconds serve as identification points for our ears. We recognize the location of a pitch in a scale based on its relationship to one of the minor seconds. Most people hear music as combinations of scale degrees. Each scale degree has a unique sound that results from its energy and desire toward resolution. Memorizing the unique sound of each scale degree is essential for learning how to hear and sing musical structures.

The musical patterns that appear below are effective ways for memorizing the unique sound of each scale degree. Notice that some scale degrees have more than one pattern associated with them. In these cases, learn to use all of them. Begin by establishing a key by playing or hearing a chord progression or scale. For now, we will learn all of the scale degrees in the key of D major. Be aware, however, that changing keys does not alter the relationship between a scale degree and its tonic pitch. A supertonic (or second) scale degree behaves the same way whether in the key of D major or in any of the eleven other major keys.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 30

30

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

EXAMPLE 1.6.2

Tonic Scale Degree 1

Supertonic Scale Degree 2

Do 1

D

Re 2

D

Mediant Scale Degree 3

Do 1

Mi 3

Re Do 2 1 Dominant Scale Degree 5 Primary Pattern

D

Subdominant Scale Degree 4

Fa 4

D

Mi 3

Do 1

D

Sol 5

Sol 5

La 6

Ti 7

Do 1

D

La 6

Sol 5

Mi 3

Sol 5

Do 1

Submediant Scale Degree 6 Alternate Pattern

Submediant Scale Degree 6 Primary Pattern

D

Do 1

Dominant Scale Degree 5 Second Alternate Pattern

Dominant Scale Degree 5 First Alternate Pattern

D

Mi 3

Do 1

D

La 6

Ti 7

Do 1

Leading Tone Scale Degree 7

Ti 7

Do 1

Hearing The major scale is often described as having a “bright, “clear,” and “happy” sound when contrasted with its opposite, the minor scale. Listen specifically for the brightness of scale degrees 3 and 6. Listen for the relative closeness between scale degrees 3 to 4 and 7 to 1.

Singing Practice singing scales, chords, and melodies not as a succession of intervals but instead as scale degrees. This will improve both your accuracy and intonation. To make sure you are doing this, try the following exercises.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 31

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

31

1. Give yourself a pitch and treat it as tonic. Sing each scale degree pattern in order. The following demonstrates this in the key of D Major:

EXAMPLE 1.6.3

D

Do Re Do 1 2 1

Mi Re Do Fa Mi Do Sol Mi Do La Sol Mi Do 3 2 1 4 3 1 5 3 1 6 5 3 1

Ti Do 7 1

Ti Do 7 1

Ti Do Sol Do 7 1 5 1

2. Sing each scale degree in order, hearing but not singing the pattern that returns it to tonic in your head. 3. Leave out one or more scale degrees in the scale, and then checking the accuracy of the following pitch. For example, here is the D major scale with scale degrees 4 and 6 removed.

EXAMPLE 1.6.4

D

Do 1

Re 2

Mi (Fa) 4 3

Sol (La) 6 5

Ti 7

Do 1

Do 1

Ti (La) Sol 6 7 5

(Fa) 4

Mi 3

Re 2

Do 1

Assignments for Practice Developing the ability to sing and identify any scale degree (once you know where tonic is) is the most essential skill you need to develop in order to understand the music that you hear. Here are some other suggestions for singing and recognizing scale degrees: 1. Sing the scale degree patterns in a random order, always returning to the same tonic pitch. 2. With a practice partner, have one person establish a key at the piano and then play or sing random scale degrees within that key. The other person should try to identify each scale degree by singing its pattern. (If practicing alone, put yourself in the key of C major at the piano, close your eyes and play random “white key” pitches.) 3. Given a pitch, be able to sing any of the scale degree patterns from it to find the tonic pitch. 4. Practice singing major scales beginning on any scale degree. For example, sing a major scale from scale degree 2 up to scale degree 2 and back down. Once you start to sing major scales beginning on any pitch, begin to pay attention to how each key, although it utilizes the same progression of major and minor seconds, has a unique sound. For example, musicians often describe the E major scale as having a “brighter” sound than its neighbor, E-flat major.

Pitch Patterns See the section on reading treble and bass clefs for instructions on performing these pitch patterns.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 32

32

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

PITCH PATTERN 1.6.1

PITCH PATTERN 1.6.2

Melodies As you sing the following melodies, make sure that you are singing scale degrees and not intervals up or down from the previous note. Check yourself by randomly pausing to sing the scale degree pattern for a pitch you just sang. Listen also for the musical focus of each melody. Try to communicate it using at least two different musical techniques (phrasing, dynamics, etc.). MELODY 1.6.1

Moderato

MELODY 1.6.2

Allegro non troppo

Pay attention to the articulation markings in the following melody. How do they help to tell a musical story? MELODY 1.6.3

Moderato

MELODY 1.6.4

Largo

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 33

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

How do dynamics create a story in this melody? MELODY 1.6.5

Andante

MELODY 1.6.6

Lento

MELODY 1.6.7

Vif

MELODY 1.6.8

Mässig

33

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 34

34

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

MELODY 1.6.9

Vite

MELODY 1.6.10

Andante

Work to make all of the notes even in attack and length in the following melody. MELODY 1.6.11

Allegro

sempre

MELODY 1.6.12

Presto

Duets Which voice creates stability in this duet? How is this achieved? DUET 1.6.1

Andante

DUET 1.6.2

Joyfully

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 35

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

35

DUET 1.6.3

Moderato

Chorale Pay attention to intonation and blend as you sing this. Take turns practicing all four voices. CHORALE 1.6

Cantabile

Self-Accompanied Melody Sing the top line while playing the bottom part on a piano. Learn to perform the following by yourself with a steady tempo and musicality.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 36

36

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 1.6

Moderato

1.7 Major and Minor Seconds Major Seconds

Facts You Need to Know Major seconds are created by two pitches that are separated by a single note. For example, D to E have the pitch D# or Eb between them. Major seconds occur in five places in the major scale: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Between scale degrees 1 and 2 Between scale degrees 2 and 3 Between scale degrees 4 and 5 Between scale degrees 5 and 6 Between scale degrees 6 and 7

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 37

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

37

EXAMPLE 1.7.1 This note separates A and B, making them a major second apart.

A

B

C

This note separates # E and F , making them a major second apart.

D

E

F

G

Major seconds occur in seven places in the minor scale: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Between scale degrees 1 and 2 Between scale degrees 3 and 4 Between scale degrees 4 and 5 Between scale degrees 5 and #6 Between scale degrees b6 and b7 Between scale degrees #6 and #7 Between scale degrees b7 and 1

Major seconds are dissonant intervals.

Hearing Upon hearing a musical sound, your ear goes through the process of 1) figuring out where it hears tonic, 2) assigning scale degrees to the components of the musical sound, and 3) hearing those scale degrees in relation to the tonic it hears. The problem most untrained and beginning musicians have isn’t in hearing and understanding what they hear, it is in being able to place labels on the sounds they hear. Most people can hear when music sounds “right” or “wrong” because their ear understands how music should sound. An important goal of your musical training is to learn how to attach labels to the sounds that your ear already understands. That is the dual process of hearing and understanding the music that you hear. Learning to recognize intervals is an early step in being able to recognize larger musical structures. The steps below describe hearing major and minor seconds, but they apply to any interval or chord. Pay close attention to how these steps are used throughout this text to recognize and label the tremendous variety of structures found in music. 1. Listen for the relative stability of the two pitches. The lower pitch should sound more stable and the upper pitch more active.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 38

38

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

2. Hear the lower pitch as tonic. Hear the strong pull of the upper pitch, scale degree 2, wanting to resolve down by step to scale degree 1, like the last two notes of a descending major scale.

EXAMPLE 1.7.2

G

Do 1

Ti 7

La 6

Sol 5

Fa 4

Mi 3

Re 2

Do 1

3. When listening to a harmonic major second, hear the dissonant sound and narrowness of the interval. 4. Listen for the lower pitch wanting to resolve down to a more consonant minor third. In this case, you are really hearing scale degrees 4 up to 5 in the major mode. You might recognize this sound as the first notes of the popular song “Chopsticks.”

EXAMPLE 1.7.3

G

Sol 5

Sol 5

Fa 4

Mi 3

Singing 1. Use scale degrees 1 up to 2 in the major scale as your point of reference. 2. When singing an ascending major second, hear the given pitch as tonic. From this pitch, sing all of the scale degree patterns to firmly establish this pitch as tonic.

EXAMPLE 1.7.4

E

Do Re Do 1 2 1

Mi Re Do Fa Mi Do Sol Mi Do 3 2 1 4 3 1 5 3 1

La Sol Mi Do 6 5 3 1

Ti Do 7 1

Ti Do 7 1

Ti Do Sol Do 7 1 5 1

3. Pay particular attention to the pattern for scale degree 2. Sing from scale degree 1 up to scale degree 2.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 39

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

39

EXAMPLE 1.7.5

E

Do Re Ma - jor Se - cond 1 2

4. When singing a descending major second, hear the given pitch as scale degree 2. Find the tonic by singing the scale degree pattern for scale degree 2. If you have trouble hearing this, try singing up to scale degree 4 then down to scale degree 1.

EXAMPLE 1.7.6

or E

Re 2

Do 1

E

Re 2

Mi 3

Fa 4

Mi 3

Re 2

Do 1

5. If necessary, orient yourself around this tonic by singing all of the scale degree patterns from this pitch. 6. Sing scale degree 2 down to 1.

EXAMPLE 1.7.7

E

Re Do Ma - jor Se - cond 2 1

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 40

40

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

Minor Seconds

Facts You Need to Know Minor seconds consist of two pitches with consecutive letter names that are adjacent to each other on the piano keyboard.

EXAMPLE 1.7.8 These pairs of notes (A# to B and E to F) are next to each other, creating minor seconds.

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

Minor seconds occur in the following places in the major scale: 1. Between scale degrees 3 and 4 2. Between scale degrees 7 and 1 Minor seconds occur in the following places in the minor scale: 1. Between scale degrees 2 and 3 2. Between scale degrees 5 and b6 3. Between scale degrees #7 and 1 Minor seconds are the defining sounds that tell our ears where a pitch is within a scale. They serve as the intervals that point to the location of tonic. Minor seconds are very strong, biting, and close dissonances.

Hearing 1. Listen for the relative stability of the two pitches. The higher pitch should sound far more stable, and the lower should sound far more active. 2. Hear the higher pitch as tonic and the lower pitch as scale degree 7. Confirm this by singing the pattern for scale degree 7 from the lower pitch to the higher pitch. Make sure all of your pitches match the pitches you were given.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 41

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

41

EXAMPLE 1.7.9

B

Do 1

Re 2

Mi 3

Fa 4

Sol 5

La 6

Ti 7

Do 1

3. Harmonically, listen for a very intense and biting dissonance.

Singing 1. Use scale degrees 7 up to 1 in the major mode as your point of reference. 2. If singing an ascending minor second, hear the given pitch as scale degree 7. Sing the pattern for this scale degree to find tonic. Sing both scale degrees.

EXAMPLE 1.7.10

F

Ti Do Mi -nor Se - cond 7 1

3. If singing a descending minor second, hear the given pitch as scale degree 1. Orient yourself around this tonic by singing through all of the scale degree patterns.

EXAMPLE 1.7.11

F

Do Re Do 1 2 1

Mi Re Do 3 2 1

Fa Mi Do Sol Mi Do La Sol Mi Do 4 3 1 5 3 1 6 5 3 1

4. Sing scale degree 1 and scale degree 7.

EXAMPLE 1.7.12

F

Do Ti Mi -nor Se - cond 1 7

Ti Do 7 1

Ti Do 7 1

Ti Do Sol Do 7 1 5 1

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 42

42

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

Assignments for Practice 1. Give yourself a pitch and sing a melodic minor second above it. Once you have sung that correctly, sing a melodic minor second below that same pitch. After that, sing melodic major seconds above and below that same pitch. Be sure to follow your procedures for singing melodic intervals. 2. With a friend (or with the piano if you are practicing alone), sing harmonic minor and major seconds above and below selected pitches. Work for good tuning and blend.

Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 1.7.1

PITCH PATTERN 1.7.2

Melodies MELODY 1.7.1

Moderato

MELODY 1.7.2

Allegro (in 1)

MELODY 1.7.3

Vif

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 43

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

MELODY 1.7.4

Moderato

MELODY 1.7.5

Andante

MELODY 1.7.6

Moderato

Pay attention to articulation markings in this melody.

MELODY 1.7.7

With energy

MELODY 1.7.8

Andante

43

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 44

44

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

MELODY 1.7.9

Vite

MELODY 1.7.10

Lento

MELODY 1.7.11

Presto

MELODY 1.7.12

Modéré

Duets Sing the harmonic seconds in the following duets with confidence. Crescendo into a dissonant interval and then decrescendo into its resolution; this can be an effective performance technique.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 45

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

DUET 1.7.1

Presto

DUET 1.7.2

Largo

DUET 1.7.3

Smoothly

Chorale Focus on the melodic goal of your individual line. Don’t be afraid of a little dissonance!

CHORALE 1.7

Like a whisper

45

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 46

46

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 1.7

1.8 Major and Minor Thirds Major Thirds

Facts You Need to Know Thirds are a consonant interval, often described as having a “pleasing” or “pretty” sound. Major thirds occur in the following places in a major scale: 1. Between scale degrees 1 and 3 2. Between scale degrees 4 and 6 3. Between scale degrees 5 and 7 The places where major thirds occur is significant because they represent the root and third of the tonic, subdominant, and dominant triads. This will be important to keep in mind as you develop your sightsinging skills. Major thirds occur in the following places in the minor scale: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Between scale degrees 3 and 5 Between scale degrees 4 and #6 Between scale degrees 5 and #7 Between scale degrees b6 and 1 Between scale degrees b7 and 2

Major thirds are imperfect consonances, meaning they have a complex yet pleasing and bright sound.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 47

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

47

Hearing Remember that your ear understands intervals as scale degrees around an implied tonic pitch. Your challenge is to identify, understand, and label the sound that your ear already knows. To hear major thirds, follow these steps: 1. Listen first for the relative stability of the two pitches. The lower pitch usually has the much more stable sound of tonic, while the higher pitch usually sounds like it wants to resolve down from scale degree 3, through scale degree 2, and down to tonic.

EXAMPLE 1.8.1

A

Mi 3

Re 2

Do 1

2. Note that you are hearing scale degrees 1 and 3 in the major scale, and use your knowledge of harmony to identify that interval as a major third. (We can’t always control how we hear a musical sound. You may hear a major third as one of the other combinations of scale degrees listed above. Be aware of 1) your internal sense of tonic, and 2) the component scale degrees of the sound that you hear. Use your knowledge of the major or minor scale to figure out the interval that separates the scale degrees you hear.) 3. Harmonic major thirds are a narrow imperfect consonance, meaning the pitches are relatively close together and they have a complex and pleasing sound. Listen for the bright sound of the interval.

Singing Use scale degrees 1 to 3 to sing a major third. 1. To sing an ascending M3, hear your given pitch as scale degree 1, and orient yourself around it by singing all of the scale degree patterns to set up the key.

EXAMPLE 1.8.2

G

Do 1

Re Do 2 1

Mi Re Do Fa Mi Do Sol Mi Do 3 2 1 4 3 1 5 3 1

La Sol Mi Do 6 5 3 1

Ti Do 7 1

Ti Do 7 1

Ti Do Sol Do 7 1 5 1

2. As you orient yourself around the tonic, isolate scale degrees 1 up to 3—that’s an ascending M3.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 48

48

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

EXAMPLE 1.8.3

G

Do Mi Ma - jor Third 1 3

To sing a descending major third: 1. Hear the given pitch as scale degree 3. Sing the pattern for scale degree 3 to find tonic. If you have trouble, try singing up to scale degree 4 and then down to tonic.

EXAMPLE 1.8.4

or G

Mi 3

Re 2

Do 1

G

Mi 3

Fa 4

Mi 3

Re 2

Do 1

2. Isolate the outer pitches—you have sung a descending M3.

EXAMPLE 1.8.5

G

Mi Do Ma - jor Third 3 1

Minor Thirds

Facts You Need to Know Minor thirds occur in the following places in the major scale: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Between scale degrees 3 and 5 Between scale degrees 2 and 4 Between scale degrees 6 and 1 Between scale degrees 7 and 2

Minor thirds occur in the following places in the minor scale: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Between scale degrees 1 and 3 Between scale degrees 2 and 4 Between scale degrees 4 and b6 Between scale degrees 5 and b7 Between scale degrees #6 and 1 Between scale degrees #7 and 2

Minor thirds are imperfect consonants intervals with a darker, less stable sound than major thirds.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 49

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

49

Hearing 1. Use scale degrees 3 and 5 as your point of reference for minor thirds. Notice that this interval requires you to hear a tonic pitch that is not part of the interval—it is a third below the lower pitch. 2. The top pitch will sound like scale degree 5 wanting to move to tonic through scale degree 3. The bottom pitch will sound like scale degree 3 wanting to move stepwise to tonic.

EXAMPLE 1.8.6

Given interval

Hear the upper pitch as scale degree 5

Sol 5

D

Mi 3

Hear the lower pitch as scale degree 3

Do 1

D

Mi 3

Re 2

Do 1

3. You might also hear this as the top two pitches of a major triad. Hear the “melody” formed by this interval as continuing to that tonic pitch.

EXAMPLE 1.8.7

Hear

Given Interval

( Sol 5

F

Mi 3

)

(Do) 1

Singing 1. To sing an ascending m3, hear the given pitch as scale degree 3. Find tonic by singing the pattern for scale degree 3, then orient yourself in the key by singing scale degree patterns, like this:

EXAMPLE 1.8.8

Mi 3

G

Do Re Do Mi Re Do 1 2 1 3 2 1

Fa Mi Do 4 3 1

Re 2

Do 1

Sol Mi Do La Sol Mi Do Ti Do Ti Do Ti Do Sol Do 5 3 1 6 5 3 1 7 1 7 1 7 1 5 1

2. Isolate scale degrees 3 and 5—you will be singing an ascending m3.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 50

50

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

EXAMPLE 1.8.9

E

Mi 3

Sol 5

Mi -nor Third

3. Use the same process to sing a descending minor third. Hear the given pitch as scale degree 5, sing tonic by singing the pattern for 5, then sing scale degrees 5 to 3, a minor third.

EXAMPLE 1.8.10

D

Sol 5

Mi 3

Mi -nor Third

You can also use scale degrees 7 and 2 to sing minor thirds. For some, this might be easier because of the close proximity of 2 and 7 to tonic. If you choose this method, orient yourself in the key by singing the pattern for scale degrees 1, 2, and 7, and follow the established process.

Assignments for Practice 1. Give yourself a pitch and practice singing major and minor thirds above and below it. Work for stellar intonation. 2. Practice singing a major scale in thirds, two ways, as shown:

EXAMPLE 1.8.11

Do Mi Re Fa Mi Sol Fa La Sol Ti La Do Ti Re Do 1 3 2 4 3 5 4 6 5 7 6 1 7 2 1

Do La Ti Sol La Fa Sol Mi Fa Re Mi Do Re Ti Do 1 6 7 5 6 4 5 3 4 2 3 1 2 7 1

Clap on the crusis of each measure while you sing. Be mindful of and focus on your intonation as you perform these exercises. Start slowly, and gradually increase your tempo, making sure you stay in tune as the tempo increases. Sing with numbers first, then repeat using syllables. These exercises will help you to hear thirds harmonically as well as help you to sing in tune: 1. Sing thirds with a friend. Choose a pitch on the piano; you sing that pitch while your friend sings the major or minor third above it, then below it. Change roles. 2. Sing a scale in thirds with the piano. Start singing the scale on tonic and begin playing on the third scale degree, then reverse the procedure. You will be singing thirds harmonically with the piano. 3. Use the same idea of singing in thirds, but this time, sing in canon with the piano. Start by playing the scale on the piano; when the piano reaches the third scale degree, begin singing the scale on tonic. Ascend and descend, not repeating the upper tonic.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 51

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

51

Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 1.8.1

PITCH PATTERN 1.8.2

Melodies When singing skips, don’t “guess” at the second pitch. Maintain the integrity of the interval by hearing and singing both pitches as scale degrees in the key. MELODY 1.8.1

Andantino

MELODY 1.8.2

Comodo

MELODY 1.8.3

Mässig

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 52

52

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

MELODY 1.8.4

Mässig

rit. Pay attention to articulation markings in the following melody. How do they create a musical story? MELODY 1.8.5

Andantino

MELODY 1.8.6

Vite

tres leger

Sing the major scale in thirds before attempting this melody. How does it relate to what is happening in the melody? MELODY 1.8.7

Vif

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 53

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

MELODY 1.8.8

Allegretto

What makes holding onto tonic somewhat tricky in the following melody? MELODY 1.8.9

Adagio

Thoughtfully

MELODY 1.8.10

Vivace

MELODY 1.8.11

Gracefully

53

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 54

54

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

MELODY 1.8.12

Vivace

giocoso

MELODY 1.8.13

Andante

cantabile

Notice the beaming in the following melody. What does this mean for performance? MELODY 1.8.14

Allegretto

MELODY 1.8.15

Allegretto

cresc.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 55

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

55

Duets DUET 1.8.1

Andante

Legato

DUET 1.8.2

Moderato

DUET 1.8.3

Andante moderato

cresc.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 56

56

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

Chorale CHORALE 1.8

Solemnly

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 1.8

Waltz tempo

Waltz tempo

simile

1.9 Perfect Fifths and Octaves Perfect Fifths

Facts You Need to Know Perfect fifths are one of the most defining intervals in tonal music. They serve as the basis for the strongest and most frequent type of chord motion. Perfect fifths occur in six places in the major scale: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Between scale degrees 1 and 5 Between scale degrees 2 and 6 Between scale degrees 3 and 7 Between scale degrees 4 and 1 Between scale degrees 5 and 2 Between scale degrees 6 and 3

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 57

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

57

Perfect fifths occur in six places in the minor scale: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Between scale degrees 1 and 5 Between scale degrees 3 and b7 Between scale degrees 4 and 1 Between scale degrees 5 and 2 Between scale degrees b6 and 3 Between scale degrees b7 and 4

Perfect fifths are perfect consonances. They are often described as having a “hollow,” “open,” or “ringing” sound.

Hearing 1. When hearing melodic perfect fifths, the lower pitch usually has the more stable sound of tonic, while the upper pitch has the more active sound of scale degree 5.

EXAMPLE 1.9.1

A

Do 1

A

Sol 5

Mi 3

Do 1

2. When hearing harmonic perfect fifths, listen for the characteristic “perfect” quality—a hollow, open, and ringing sound. Listen for how the top pitch has a strong desire to resolve down to the bottom pitch.

Singing 1. Use scale degrees 1 to 5 in the major mode as your point of reference. 2. When singing an ascending perfect fifth, hear your given pitch as tonic. Orient yourself around this tonic by singing through the scale degree patterns for this key. 3. Find scale degree 5 above tonic. Sing the scale degrees and interval quality and size.

EXAMPLE 1.9.2

E

Do Sol Per - fect Fifth 1 5

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 58

58

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

4. When singing a descending perfect fifth, hear the given pitch as scale degree 5. Sing the pattern for this scale degree or a descending scale to find tonic. 5. If necessary, orient yourself around this tonic by singing scale degree patterns. 6. Sing the scale degrees and interval quality and size.

EXAMPLE 1.9.3

F

Sol Do Per - fect Fifth 5 1

Perfect Octaves

Facts You Need to Know Perfect octaves are perfect consonances. They have an even more pure and open sound than perfect fifths. Often, the higher pitch seems to “disappear” into the sound of the lower pitch. Perfect octaves occur on all scale degrees in the major and minor scale.

Hearing 1. Listen for a wide consonance. Listen also for the scale degree of each pitch. If the scale degrees are the same, but in different registers, then you are hearing a perfect octave. 2. If played harmonically, listen for a very pure and open sound that is wider than a perfect fifth and in which the upper pitch seems to blend very easily into the sound of the lower pitch.

Singing 1. Use scale degree 1 up to 1 in the major mode as your point of reference. 2. Hear the given pitch as tonic. Orient yourself around this tonic by singing the scale degree patterns. 3. Pay particular attention to the pattern and resolution of scale degree 7 in both octaves. Also, you may find arpeggiating through the pitches of the tonic triad to be helpful.

EXAMPLE 1.9.4

B

Do 1

Mi 3

Sol 5

Do 1

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 59

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

59

4. Sing the scale degrees and interval quality and size.

EXAMPLE 1.9.5

Do Do 1 1 Per - fect Oc - tave

B

B

Do Do Per - fect Oc - tave 1 1

Assignments for Practice 1. Practice giving yourself a pitch and singing a perfect fifth above it. Once that is in tune, sing a perfect fifth below it with good intonation. 2. Learn the major scale in fifths that appears below. Be aware that one dyad (pair of notes) ascending and one dyad descending (those from scale degrees 4 to 7) create a diminished fifth or tritone. For now, just sing those intervals as their respective scale degrees and notice how they sound different than the perfect fifths.

EXAMPLE 1.9.6 Major Mode

F

Do Sol Re La Mi Ti Fa Do Sol Re La Mi Ti Fa Do 1 5 2 6 3 7 4 1 5 2 6 3 7 4 1

Do Fa Ti Mi La Re Sol Do 1 4 7 3 6 2 5 1

Fa Ti Mi La Re Sol Do 4 7 3 6 2 5 1

Minor Mode

f

Do Sol Re Le Me Te Fa Do Sol Re La Me Ti Fa Do 1 5 2 6 3 7 4 1 5 2 6 3 7 4 1

Do Fa Te Me Le Re Sol Do Fa Ti Me La Re Sol Do 1 4 7 3 6 2 5 1 4 7 3 6 2 5 1

3. Listen for and identify perfect fifths in music that you hear, sing, or practice.

Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 1.9.1

PITCH PATTERN 1.9.2

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 60

60

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

Melodies Remember to sing skips as combinations of scale degrees as you work through these melodies. MELODY 1.9.1

Stately

MELODY 1.9.2

Majestically

MELODY 1.9.3

Moderately

MELODY 1.9.4

Forcefully

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 61

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

MELODY 1.9.5

Largamente

MELODY 1.9.6

Vivace

Divide this melody into an upper and lower line before singing. How is each line constructed? MELODY 1.9.7

Lento

MELODY 1.9.8

Allegro

61

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 62

62

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

MELODY 1.9.9

Vivace

giocoso

How many phrases are in this melody, and what do the rests do to your sense of musical continuity? MELODY 1.9.10

Allegretto

MELODY 1.9.11

Geschwindt

crescendo

decrescendo

Divide this melody into two lines before singing. Compare it to melody 1.9.7.

MELODY 1.9.12

Comodo

calando

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 63

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

63

MELODY 1.9.13

Lento

morendo

MELODY 1.9.14

Slowly and thoughtfully

rit. MELODY 1.9.15

Moderato

Duets Provide your own tempo and style marking for this duet. DUET 1.9.1

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 64

64

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

DUET 1.9.2

Vif

DUET 1.9.3

Allegro

Chorale CHORALE 1.9

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 65

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 1.9

Moderato

lightly

1.10 Major Triads in Root Position Facts You Need to Know Triads are three-note chords. Major triads are generally described as having a “bright,” “happy,” and stable sound. They consist of a major third between the root and third, a minor third between the third and fifth, and a perfect fifth between the root and fifth.

EXAMPLE 1.10.1

P5 m3

M3 D

Do 1

Mi 3

Sol 5

Major triads occur in three places in the major scale:

65

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 66

66

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

1. As the tonic (I) triad, consisting of scale degrees 1, 3, and 5. 2. As the subdominant (IV) triad, consisting of scale degrees 4, 6, and 1. 3. As the dominant (V) triad, consisting of scale degrees 5, 7, and 2. Major triads occur in four places in the minor scale: 1. 2. 3. 4.

As the mediant (III) triad, consisting of scale degrees 3, 5, and b7. As the dominant (V) triad, consisting of scale degrees 5, #7, and 2. As the submediant (VI) triad, consisting of scale degrees b6, 1, and 3. As the subtonic (bVII) triad, consisting of scale degrees b7, 2, and 4.

Hearing 1. Listen for the bright, happy, and stable sound of the chord. 2. Listen for the component scale degrees, usually 1, 3, and 5 in the major mode. Be aware that you may hear one of the other possibilities above.

Singing 1. Use the tonic (I) triad, consisting of scale degrees 1, 3, and 5, as your point of reference. 2. Hear your given pitch as either scale degree 1, 3, or 5, depending on the requested ordering. If necessary, sing the scale degree pattern for this pitch to set up the key.

EXAMPLE 1.10.2

Sing this pattern to find tonic if your given pitch is the... third

root

B

Do 1

B

Mi 3

Re 2

fifth

Do 1

3. Sing the component scale degrees in the correct order.

EXAMPLE 1.10.3

B

Do 1

Mi 3

Sol 5

Ma - jor

Tri - ad

B

Sol 5

Mi 3

Do 1

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 67

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

67

Assignments for Practice 1. Be able to sing a major triad from any given pitch. 2. From the given pitch, figure out how to hear each triad as the subdominant in the key or the dominant in the key. This will involve finding a different tonic pitch than the one you would use when hearing the triad as tonic. Once you have sung each triad, find a logical resolution to the tonic pitch and arpeggiate through the tonic triad to establish the stability of the key. 3. Treat your given pitch as the third or fifth of the triad. From this, sing the correct scale degree pattern to find tonic before singing the triad. 4. Rearrange the order of the pitches for your major triad. Notice that there are only six ways to arrange the pitches in a three-note set such as a triad.

EXAMPLE 1.10.4

First Ordering

Second Ordering

Do Mi 1 3 Third Ordering

Sol 5

Do Sol 1 5 Fourth Ordering

Mi 3

Mi Do 3 1 Fifth Ordering

Sol 5

Mi 3 Sixth Ordering

Sol 5

Do 1

Mi 3

Do 1

G

G

G

Sol 5

Do 1

Mi 3

G

G

G

Sol 5

Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 1.10.1

PITCH PATTERN 1.10.2

Melodies Look for examples of major triads in each melody you sing. Be aware that sometimes the triads will be arranged into different orderings.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 68

68

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

MELODY 1.10.1

Allegretto leggiero

MELODY 1.10.2

Allegro

MELODY 1.10.3

Geschwindt

MELODY 1.10.4

Langsam

dolce

sempre

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 69

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

MELODY 1.10.5

Largamente

MELODY 1.10.6

Animato

MELODY 1.10.7

Calmly

MELODY 1.10.8

Lively

MELODY 1.10.9

Allegro

69

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 70

70

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

MELODY 1.10.10

Moderato cantabile

MELODY 1.10.11

Vite

MELODY 1.10.12

Tres lent

What effect do the rests in the next melody have on the musical line? How can you maintain the integrity of the phrase across the rests?

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 71

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

71

MELODY 1.10.13

Allegretto

MELODY 1.10.14

Schnell

leicht

MELODY 1.10.15

Andantino

cantabile

rit.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 72

72

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

Duets DUET 1.10.1

Lento

DUET 1.10.2

Vivace

DUET 1.10.3

Giocoso

detached

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 73

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

Chorale CHORALE 1.10

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 1.10

Allegretto

1.11 Improvision I: Tonic Function Facts You Need to Know Tonic function is the most stable function in tonal music. The desire to return to tonic is built into the tonal musical system. Tonic function is carried by the tonic chord (I in major, i in minor). Sometimes the submediant chord (vi and VI) or the mediant chord (iii and III) act like they carry tonic function. Note that all of these chords contain scale degree 1, which gives this chord class its stability, and scale degree three, which establishes major or minor modality. When improvising tonic function, focus on singing scale degrees 1, 3, and 5 as your primary tones. To improvise in tonic, use the following techniques: 1. Repetition: repeat a scale degree in the tonic triad. EXAMPLE 1.11.1

73

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 74

74

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

2. Arpeggiation: jump between scale degrees in the tonic triad.

EXAMPLE 1.11.2

3. Connected arpeggiation: fill in the jumps between the members of the tonic triad. EXAMPLE 1.11.3

When improvising, pay attention to the amount of time you have to fill. Keep counting! Make your improvisation fit with the rest of the music by using motives and rhythms found elsewhere in the melody. Improvision happens frequently in some styles of music (jazz and popular), but can be needed at any time, such as when an instrument malfunctions, the wind blows a page of music off the stand, or your memory leaves you under the stress of live performance.

Singing Below is a demonstration of how to approach a melody that requires improvisation of tonic function:

EXAMPLE 1.11.4

Cantabile

Improvise Tonic Function

1. Notice the blank measure and instruction to improvise tonic function. Sing through the notated measures, leaving a space or singing scale degree 1 in the blank measure. Notice rhythmic or melodic elements that you may be able to imitate. Notice the general level of rhythmic activity and whether the melody tends to leap or step. Remember that you want your improvisation to sound like it fits with the rest of the music. 2. Plan your improvisation. Notice that the last written note before the improvisation is scale degree 5, and the first note after it is scale degree 4. You may want to start and end on scale degree 5 and end on scale degree 1 to make the transition in and out of the improvisation smoother and easier. 3. Internalize the meter; be aware of the crusis of the measure.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 75

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

75

4. Try out a few ideas using the three techniques above (repetition, arpeggiation, connected arpeggiation). EXAMPLE 1.11.5

Cantabile

Improvise Tonic Function (Repetition)

Cantabile

Improvise Tonic Function

(Arpeggiation)

Cantabile

Improvise Tonic Function

(Connected Arpeggiation)

Cantabile

Improvise Tonic Function

(Connected Arpeggiation)

5. Sing the melody, inserting ideas that you liked in the blank measure.

Assignments for Practice 1. Set yourself up in a key and repeat a tonic function chord in time. Improvise tonic function over it. Ask a friend to join you to improvise a duet. 2. Experiment with using other scale degrees in tonic function improvisation. Listen for how they affect the sound and shape of your improvisation.

Melodies Improvise tonic function in the blank measures of the melodies below. Be sure to make your rhythm fit with the rest of the melody: MELODY 1.11.1

Allegretto

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 76

76

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

MELODY 1.11.2

Moderato

MELODY 1.11.3

Andantino

MELODY 1.11.4

Lento

MELODY 1.11.5

Moderato

MELODY 1.11.6

Not too fast

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 77

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

MELODY 1.11.7

Adagio

espressivo

MELODY 1.11.8

Moderato

MELODY 1.11.9

Allegro

MELODY 1.11.10

Vif

77

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 78

78

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

Duets DUET 1.11.1

Allegro

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 1.11

Andantino

1.12 Music from the Literature The following melodies are part of the standard repertoire. Find out what you can about each melody, its composer, and the musical and stylistic context in which it should be performed. Be aware that sometimes the key signature is not an indicator of the key center. Look for a variety of indicators (first and last pitch, high and low pitch, key signature and accidentals) to determine the key before starting.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 79

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

79

EXAMPLE 1.12.1

An Wasserflussen Babylon J.S. Bach

EXAMPLE 1.12.2

“Jesu Leiden, Pein und Tod,” from the St. John Passion

J.S. Bach

EXAMPLE 1.12.3

Sonatina in C Major, Tarantella, Op. 157, No. 1, II m. 25-32 Vivace

Spindler

cresc.

EXAMPLE 1.12.4 Minuet

Moderato

James Hook

Sing this melody in your most comfortable vocal range. EXAMPLE 1.12.5

Sonatina in C Major, Op. 36, No. 3, II m. 13–16 Un poco adagio

Clementi

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 80

80

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

Take some time to work out the rhythms in the following example. Despite the “short” note values, it moves slowly. Where skips occur, find the second note by hearing its scale degree. Notice how each musical fragment begins on the same pitch. Retain this pitch in your memory as you sing each melodic fragment. EXAMPLE 1.12.6

Symphony No. 1 in C Major, Op. 21, Fourth movement

violin 1

Beethoven

Adagio

Allegro molto e vivace

Sing the leaps in the following melody by hearing the scale degree that goes with each pitch. Notice the underlying stepwise motion that holds the melody together. EXAMPLE 1.12.7

String Quartet No. 80, Op. 76, No. 6, Second movement

m. 1–8

Adagio

Haydn

EXAMPLE 1.12.8 British Folk Song

Moderato

cresc.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 81

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

81

EXAMPLE 1.12.9

Echoing, Op. 218 Louis Kohler

EXAMPLE 1.12.10

Salti di terza Andantino

Nicola Vaccai

EXAMPLE 1.12.11

m. 4–8 Allegro

Allegro W.F. Bach

EXAMPLE 1.12.12

Little Sonata I. Moderato

C.H. Wilton

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 82

82

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

EXAMPLE 1.12.13 French Folk Song

Allegretto

dim.

cresc.

EXAMPLE 1.12.14

Stepping Dance Allegro

Smetana

piu

EXAMPLE 1.12.15

Piano Sonata in G Major, Op. 49, No. 2, First movement m. 20–28 Allegro, ma non troppo

Beethoven

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 83

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

83

EXAMPLE 1.12.16

Vittoria, mio core! Giacomo Carissimi

Allegro con brio

EXAMPLE 1.12.17

Se Florindo e fedele m. 17–30 A. Scarlatti

Allegretto grazioso, moderato assai dolce

EXAMPLE 1.12.18

Symphony No. 35, "Haffner," K.385, First movement

m. 1–5

Allegro

Mozart

Reflections: Why Study Solfège? A well-conceived solfège course teaches four essential skills: inner hearing, professional behavior, sensitivity to sound, and the ability to think and communicate in music. Just as authors need to be readers and artists need to have a discerning eye, musicians must have welldeveloped inner hearing. It gives us the ability to “see what we hear,” or to understand the nature, properties, and significance of the musical sounds we hear, and the ability to “hear what we see,” or to know how the images used to represent musical sound on the printed page will sound when performed. Solfège class is also a rehearsal for your career as a professional musician. In addition to hearing and performing skills, a well-crafted solfège class also begins to build good habits for preparation, practice, musical and professional interaction with peers, and strategies for taking care of one’s body, mind, and spirit. These skills often make the difference between a very talented musician who lives from job to job and a less talented but hard-working musician who maintains a long and steady career.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 84

Most musical instruments (including the voice) are capable of creating a tremendous variety of sounds. Skilled musicians learn how to manipulate these sounds with tremendous subtlety in order to communicate musical meaning. Musicians must be open to and aware of extremely fine shadings of all of the components of music (pitch, timbre, tempo, dynamics, etc.) for the purposes of understanding better how this affects musical meaning and for the enhancement of performance. Perhaps the most important goal of solfège class is the ability to think in music. This ability transforms the activity of music making from simply the performance of something someone else has created to an active collaboration between the composer, the performer, and the audience. When revered professional musicians talk about the passion and joy they have for music, they often mention how individual compositions constantly challenge them. The ability to address music on its own terms and in its own language and to be a co-partner in the process of artistic creation is what transforms musicianship from a job consisting of mechanical repetition of performance skills to a joyous lifelong pursuit. It gives music students the greatest gift they can acquire—the ability to make joyful, passionate music on one’s own. For most students, solfège presents a dramatically new way of thinking about and experiencing music as well as a type of educational experience that is unlike any course they’ve ever taken. It is skill-based, which means that improvement and eventual mastery of the material can only come through effective daily practice. Furthermore, solfège is a lifelong skill that requires an ongoing commitment to practice. In the end, the skills taught in a well-designed solfège class are a starting point for a lifelong relationship with music.

1.13 Dictation Materials I. Identification of Major Scale Degrees

Your teacher will establish a key and then play its scale degrees in random order or as a specific pitch in a melody (by number—first, second, last, or by position—high or low). Identify each by writing its number in the appropriate space. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 85

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

85

II. Interval Identification

Your teacher will play several intervals. Identify their quality and size as one of the following: M2 = Major second m2 = Minor second X = Other

M3 = Major third m3 = Minor third

P5 = Perfect fifth P8 = Perfect octave

Be sure to make a clear difference between your capital and lower-case Ms. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ III. Meter Identification

Your teacher will play several melodies. Listen for the metric division and number. Write a logical meter signature for each example. Possible answers are 42 , 34 , 44 , 22 , or “X” for other. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 86

86

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ IV. Melodic and Rhythmic Dictation

Your teacher will play a short melody or rhythm. Notate it on the staves below. To do this, follow these steps: 1. Listen first (without writing). Learn what you can about the sound of the melody, its modality (major or minor), meter, shape, and register. Try to memorize what you can. 2. First notate the rhythm above the staff. 3. Determine the scale degree of pitches that sound more important (such as the first, last, highest, lowest, or first of each measure). Write those numbers above their corresponding note in the rhythm. 4. Figure out how those “structural” pitches are approached, left, and connected to one another. 5. Notate the pitches on the staff. 6. Add in articulation, dynamic, or other musical indicators. Remember that clef, key signature and meter signature appear on the first line of music (in that order) and that only clef and key signature appear on all other lines. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 87

Simple Meter, Rests and Phrases

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

87

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 88

Chapter 2

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode and Inverted Triads

2.1 Compound Meters Facts You Need to Know Meters are defined by the number of beats in a measure and the number of parts into which each beat is divided. In compound meter, the beat is divided into three parts; and can be duple, triple, or quadruple, as indicated in the charts below:

Compound Duple Meters EXAMPLE 2.1.1

Time Signature

Beat Note Value

Beat Division

Beats per Measure 2 2 2

Or, as notated: EXAMPLE 2.1.2

Beats

Beats

Beats

Divisions

Divisions

Divisions

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 89

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

89

Compound Triple Meters EXAMPLE 2.1.3

Time Signature

Beat Note Value

Beat Division

Beats per Measure 3 3 3

Or, as notated: EXAMPLE 2.1.4

Beats

Beats

Beats

Divisions

Divisions

Divisions

Compound Quadruple Meters EXAMPLE 2.1.5

Time Signature

Beat Note Value

Beat Division

Beats per Measure 4 4 4

Or, as notated: EXAMPLE 2.1.6

Beats

Divisions

Beats

Divisions

Beats

Divisions

The division of the beat into three parts in compound meter creates the defining characteristic of the meter. Where simple meter tends to be square and angular, compound meter is circular. Why? Think in

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

90

Page 90

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

physical terms: if you were to step the two divisions of simple meter, you might look like a soldier marching. When you step the three divisions in compound meter, each beat begins on the opposite side of your body, creating a sense of sway or rocking motion; it’s circular. Traditionally, the top number of a time signature indicates the number of beats in each measure, and the bottom number indicates what kind of note gets a beat. In addition, the rules of notation state that notes belonging to the same beats are always beamed. If both those statements are true, the musical example below is contradictory. The time signature indicates that there are six beats in the measure, but the beaming suggests that there are only two beats. EXAMPLE 2.1.7

In compound meter, the beat-note value is not the eighth note, as the time signature suggests, but the dotted quarter note, so the eighth notes are beamed in groups of three. It is accepted practice to consider the beat-note value of a compound meter to be a dotted quarter, dotted eighth, or dotted half note. The time signature tells only half of the truth. Any time signature can be written using note values in conjunction with traditional Arabic numbers, as shown below. EXAMPLE 2.1.8 The top number indicates that there are four beats in each measure. The quarter note replaces the Arabic number 4 that is normally used in a time signature. The lower number 4 has a direct numeric relationship to a quarter note, so it’s easy to see how these two ways of notating a time signature relate to each other.

Utilizing the same approach in compound meter, this time signature would indicate compound duple meter: EXAMPLE 2.1.9 The top number indicates that there are two beats in each measure. The note value (replacing a number) indicates the type of note that receives one beat.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 91

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

91

It is not possible to translate the dotted quarter to a numerical equivalent. Many possibilities come to mind—6, or a 112 or a 412—but though they are logical choices, they don’t work. Therefore, we use the symbol 68 because there is not a single number to indicate the value of the dotted quarter—not because there are six beats in the measure. Common Patterns in Compound Meter EXAMPLE 2.1.10

Rhythms For the rhythms below, clap the beat and articulate the rhythm. Figure out challenging rhythms by clapping the division of the beat. RHYTHM 2.1.1

Allegro

RHYTHM 2.1.2

Presto

calando

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 92

92

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

Figure out the rhythm in measure 3 before you begin. Be sure to place the second eighth note on the beat. RHYTHM 2.1.3

Andante

RHYTHM 2.1.4

Mässig

RHYTHM 2.1.5

Adagio

RHYTHM 2.1.6

With integrity

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 93

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

RHYTHM 2.1.7

Lightly

Provide your own tempo and style indicator for the following rhythm. RHYTHM 2.1.8

RHYTHM 2.1.9

Adagio

RHYTHM 2.1.10

Tranquillo

93

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 94

94

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

RHYTHM 2.1.11

Allegretto

Two-part Rhythms TWO-PART RHYTHM 2.1.1

Moderato

TWO-PART RHYTHM 2.1.2

Adagio

TWO-PART RHYTHM 2.1.3

Vivace

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 95

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

Three-part Rhythm THREE-PART RHYTHM 2.1

Allegro

2.2 Ties and Dotted Rhythms in Simple Meter Facts You Need to Know Rhythmic patterns that use ties and the dotted rhythms derived from them serve to add interest and tension to music. Notes of any value can be dotted. A dot adds half the value of the note to the note. Thus, in 44 , a dotted quarter gets one and a half beats, a dotted eighth is equal to 3⁄4 of a beat, etc. A second dot adds half the value of the first dot to the note. (For example, a double dotted half note in 44 gets 2 beats + 1 beat + a half beat) A tie is a curved line used to rhythmically join together two notes on the same line or space of a staff. The two notes become one, the length of which is determined by adding the two note values together. Ties can be used both within and between measures: EXAMPLE 2.2.1

95

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 96

96

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

but are not used within beats: EXAMPLE 2.2.2

Incorrect

Correct

Clap the beat and articulate the following rhythms: EXAMPLE 2.2.3

The two rhythms are identical; one is written with ties, the other with dots. Regardless of the style of notation, measures 2 and 4 are problematic; the second beat seems to be “missing” because the sound is tied over from the previous beat, creating rhythmic tension. That missing beat creates one of the challenges associated with the performance of these rhythms: the tendency to rush. If you have difficulty performing this—or any—rhythm with ties, use this method: 1. Clap the beat and articulate the rhythm, omitting the ties completely. 2. Repeat immediately, adding the ties in again, but consciously inhale on the second beat of the measure where the tie is located. This will replace the “missing” beat with a sound to help you hear the rhythm completely and avoid rushing. 3. Perform as written. 4. Note: If you have difficulty figuring out this rhythm as written, clap eighth notes instead of the beat while you articulate; it will help you to “line up” the notes in the measure. The dotted-eighth–sixteenth rhythm pattern (and its reverse) tends to be even more difficult to perform accurately and musically. It is essential that you hear all four sixteenth notes to avoid the tendency of “rounding” the rhythm and performing it as if it were a compound meter rhythm. The counting methods described in 1.2, “Second Division and Second Multiple of the Beat,” can be applied to performing the dotted-eighth–sixteenth pattern as well, as shown in the example opposite:

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 97

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

97

EXAMPLE 2.2.4

1 e + a

1 e + a

1

e +a

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1

2 3 4 1

+

1

+

1

1

+

1

e +a

2 3 4

+

1

Practice both rhythms below. The first measure is in simple meter, the second, an example of the rhythm in the incorrect, “rounded” version. Learn to discriminate between the two manifestations of the rhythm. EXAMPLE 2.2.5

Clap: x

x

x

x

One general principle you can apply to the natural impulse of rhythm is that short notes lead to long notes. Except for very specific stylistic examples of the opposite tendency in music of the Renaissance, you will find this maxim to be true. There may not be a better example of the impetus for a short note to resolve itself to a long note than in these dotted and tied rhythms. The impulse is so strong, in fact, that it is easy to hear the rhythm as anacrusic rather than crusic. The same rhythmic impulse of the short note resolving to the long exists when the rhythm is turned around (eighth-dotted quarter). In this case, the short note is stressed because it falls on a beat, and the rhythm remains convincingly crusic. The short note again resolves to the long note, but the character of the long note is different; there is a sense of suspension as the duration passes “through” the missing beat.

Rhythms RHYTHM 2.2.1

Allegro con brio

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 98

98

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

RHYTHM 2.2.2

Passionately

RHYTHM 2.2.3

Lento

Pay particular attention to dynamics in the following rhythm. RHYTHM 2.2.4

Andante

cresc.

RHYTHM 2.2.5

Vif

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 99

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

RHYTHM 2.2.6

Andantino

RHYTHM 2.2.7

Larghetto

RHYTHM 2.2.8

Lente

RHYTHM 2.2.9

Geschwindt

99

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 100

100

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

RHYTHM 2.2.10

Moderato

RHYTHM 2.2.11

Moderato

How do the rests and dynamics work together to create a musical story in the following rhythm? What challenges do the rests present? RHYTHM 2.2.12

Gedehnt

Two-part Rhythms TWO-PART RHYTHM 2.2.1

Allegro con brio

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 101

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

TWO-PART RHYTHM 2.2.2

Con moto

TWO-PART RHYTHM 2.2.3

Vivo

Three-part Rhythm THREE-PART RHYTHM 2.2

Allegro con moto

101

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 102

102

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

2.3 Minor Scales and Minor Scale Degrees Facts You Need to Know Minor scales differ from major scales in three important ways: 1. The minor seconds occur in different places: Between scale degrees 2 and 3 Between scale degrees 5 and b6 Between scale degrees #7 and 1 2. Scale degree 3 is a semitone lower than its position in the major scale. 3. Scale degrees 6 and 7 each have two possible positions: lowered and raised. These differences often lead musicians to describe three forms of the minor scale. Each of these forms has the same lower five notes. They differ in the placement and usage of the variable scale degrees, 6 and 7. 1. The natural minor scale has lowered sixth and seventh scale degree. EXAMPLE 2.3.1

m2

d

Do 1

Re 2

m2

Me 3

Fa 4

Sol 5

Le 6

Te 7

Do 1

2. The harmonic minor scale has a lowered sixth and a raised seventh scale degree. EXAMPLE 2.3.2

m2

d

Do 1

Re 2

m2

Me 3

Fa 4

Sol 5

m2

Le 6

Ti 7

Do 1

3. The melodic minor scale, which has raised sixth and seventh scale degrees. EXAMPLE 2.3.3

m2

d

Do 1

Re 2

m2

Me 3

Fa 4

Sol 5

La 6

Ti 7

Do 1

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 103

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

103

The placement of the sixth and seventh scale degrees follows some basic principles: 1. Scale degree 7 is raised when supported by dominant function harmony (V or vii°), regardless of the direction the melodic line is following. 2. Scale degree 7 is lowered when supported by tonic or predominant function harmony. 3. Scale degree 6 is also raised when supported by dominant function harmony and it is a non-chord tone that connects scale degree 5 to scale degree 7. 4. Scale degree 6 is lowered at all other times. 5. When scale degrees 6 and 7 are raised, they have a strong desire to resolve to the next higher scale degree. When lowered, they have a strong desire to resolve to the next lower scale degree. The lowered sixth scale degree is one of the strongest tendency tones in tonal music. It has a very strong desire to resolve down to scale degree 5. Just like the major mode, each scale degree in the minor mode has a unique sound and desire toward resolution. Memorize the following scale degree patterns to be able to identify each scale degree’s unique sound: EXAMPLE 2.3.4 Tonic Scale Degree 1

Supertonic Scale Degree 2

Do 1

d

Re 2

d

Mediant Scale Degree 3

Do 1

Me 3

Re Do 2 1 Dominant Scale Degree 5 Primary Pattern

d

Subdominant Scale Degree 4

Fa 4

d

Me 3

Do 1

Sol 5

d

Sol 5

La 6

Ti 7

Do 1

Le 6

Sol 5

Me 3

Sol 5

d

Lowered Submediant Scale Degree 6

d

Te 7

Le 6

Do 1

Sol 5

Do 1

Raised Submediant Scale Degree 6

d

La 6

Ti 7

Subtonic Scale Degree 7

d

Do 1

Dominant Scale Degree 5 Second Alternate Pattern

Dominant Scale Degree 5 First Alternate Pattern

d

Me 3

Do 1

Leading Tone Scale Degree 7

Me 3

Do 1

d

Ti 7

Do 1

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 104

104

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

Hearing The minor scale is often described as having a “sad,” “dark,” or “intense” sound when contrasted with its opposite, the major scale. Listen specifically for the darkness of scale degrees 3 and b6. Listen for the relative closeness between scale degrees 2 to 3, 5 to b6, and #7 to 1.

Singing As with the major mode, practice singing scales, chords, and melodies not as a succession of intervals but instead as a succession of scale degrees. 1. Give yourself a pitch and treat it as tonic. Sing each scale degree pattern in order. EXAMPLE 2.3.5

b

Do Re Do 1 2 1

Me Re Do 3 2 1

Fa Me Do Sol Me Do 4 3 1 5 3 1

Le Sol Me Do 6 5 3 1

Te Le Sol Me Do 7 6 5 3 1

Ti Do 7 1

La Ti Do Sol Do 5 1 6 7 1

2. Sing each scale degree in order, hearing the pattern that returns it to tonic in your head but not singing it.

Assignments for Practice 1. Sing the scale degree patterns in a random order, always returning to the same tonic pitch. 2. With a practice partner, have one person establish a key at the piano and then play or sing random scale degrees within that key. The other person should try to identify each scale degree by singing its pattern. 3. If practicing alone, put yourself in the key of A minor at the piano. Close your eyes and play random “white key” pitches. See if you can correctly identify the scale degree of each by singing its scale degree pattern. 4. Given a tonic pitch, be able to identify how each pitch in that key wants to return to tonic using one of the patterns above. 5. Given a pitch, be able to sing any of the scale degree patterns below to establish a tonic pitch. 6. Practice all of the minor scales beginning at the top, descending to the bottom, and then returning to the top. 7. Leave out one or more scale degrees in the scale, and then check the accuracy of the following pitch. For example, here is the B-flat minor scale with scale degrees 4 and 6 removed. EXAMPLE 2.3.6

b

Do 1

Re 2

Me (Fa) 4 3

Sol (Le) 6 5

Ti 7

Do 1

Do 1

Te (Le) Sol 7 6 5

(Fa) Me 4 3

Re 2

Do 1

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 105

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

105

8. Practice singing minor scales beginning on any scale degree. For example, sing a minor scale from scale degree 2 up to scale degree 2 and back down. 9. Practice the minor scale in thirds, notated below. Notice the positions of the variable scale degrees. Try to figure out why each is in its raised or lowered position. Try singing the scale again, moving the variable scale degrees. EXAMPLE 2.3.7

b

Do Me Re Fa Me Sol Fa Le Sol Ti La Do Ti Re Do 1 3 2 4 3 5 4 6 5 7 6 1 7 2 1

Do Le Te Sol Le Fa Sol Me Fa Re Me Do Re Ti Do 1 6 7 5 6 4 5 3 4 2 3 1 2 7 1

Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 2.3.1

PITCH PATTERN 2.3.2

Melodies As always, focus on singing scale degrees instead of intervals in the melodies. Pay particular attention to the placement of the sixth and seventh scale degrees. MELODY 2.3.1

Majestically

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 106

106

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

MELODY 2.3.2

Andante

MELODY 2.3.3

Very lively

rallentando

MELODY 2.3.4

Largamente

MELODY 2.3.5

Allegro

MELODY 2.3.6

Moderato

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 107

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

MELODY 2.3.7

Allegro

marked

MELODY 2.3.8

Gently

rit.

MELODY 2.3.9

Adagio

MELODY 2.3.10

Modéré

107

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 108

108

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

Notice that the second last measure uses the raised sixth and seventh scale degrees on a descending line. If you have trouble singing this, try playing scale degree 5 on a piano while you sing this measure. MELODY 2.3.11

Allegretto

MELODY 2.3.12

Allegro

MELODY 2.3.13

Leggiero

MELODY 2.3.14

Moderately

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 109

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

MELODY 2.3.15

Moderato

Duets DUET 2.3.1

DUET 2.3.2

Smoothly

109

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 110

110

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

DUET 2.3.3

Ardently

Chorale CHORALE 2.3

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 2.3

Lento

Lento

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 111

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

111

2.4 Perfect Fourths Facts You Need to Know Perfect fourths are one of the most defining intervals in tonal music, especially when they occur melodically in the bass. Perfect fourths are perfect consonances, possessing the characteristic hollow, open, and ringing sound. Perfect fourths occur in six places in the major scale: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Between scale degrees 5 and 1 Between scale degrees 1 and 4 Between scale degrees 2 and 5 Between scale degrees 3 and 6 Between scale degrees 6 and 2 Between scale degrees 7 and 3

Perfect fourths occur in seven places in the minor scale: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Between scale degrees 5 and 1 Between scale degrees 1 and 4 Between scale degrees 2 and 5 Between scale degrees 3 and b6 Between scale degrees 4 and b7 Between scale degrees #6 and 2 Between scale degrees b7 and 3

Hearing 1. Listen for the hollow, open, and ringing sound of a perfect consonance. 2. Listen for the upper pitch having the more stable sound of tonic. 3. Listen for the lower pitch sounding like scale degree 5 and wanting to resolve up to the more stable, higher pitch.

Singing 1. Use scale degrees 5 up to 1 in either the major or minor mode as your point of reference. 2. If singing an ascending interval, sing either an alternate pattern for scale degree 5 or sing an ascending scale to find tonic.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 112

112

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

EXAMPLE 2.4.1

Sol 5

La 6

Ti 7

Do 1

Sol 5

Do 1

3. If singing a descending interval, hear the given pitch as tonic. If necessary, orient yourself around this tonic by singing all of the scale degree patterns. 4. Sing scale degrees 5 and 1 in the correct order, followed by the interval quality and size. EXAMPLE 2.4.2

Sol Do 5 1 Per - fect Fourth

A

A

Do Sol 1 5 Per - fect Fourth

Assignments for Practice 1. Practice giving yourself a pitch and singing a perfect fourth above it and then below it. 2. Learn the major and minor scales in fourths that appear below. Be aware that one dyad (pair of notes) ascending and one dyad descending (those from scale degrees 7 to 4) create an augmented fourth or tritone. EXAMPLE 2.4.3

Major Mode

E

Do Fa Re Sol Mi La Fa Ti Sol Do La Re 1 4 2 5 3 6 4 7 5 1 6 2

Ti Mi Do 7 3 1

Do Sol Ti Fa La Mi Sol Re Fa Do Mi Ti Re La Do 1 5 7 4 6 3 5 2 4 1 3 7 2 6 1

Minor Mode

e

Do Fa Re Sol Me Le Fa Te Sol Do La Re Ti Me Do 1 4 2 5 3 6 4 7 5 1 6 2 7 3 1

Do Sol Te Fa Le Me Sol Re Fa Do Me Ti Re La Do 1 5 7 4 6 3 5 2 4 1 3 7 2 6 1

3. Listen for and identify perfect fourths in music that you hear, sing, or practice.

Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 2.4.1

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 113

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

PITCH PATTERN 2.4.2

Melodies MELODY 2.4.1

Energetically

MELODY 2.4.2

Allegretto

MELODY 2.4.3

Determinedly

MELODY 2.4.4

Allegretto

rallentando

113

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 114

114

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

MELODY 2.4.5

Andante

MELODY 2.4.6

Moderato

MELODY 2.4.7

Andante

MELODY 2.4.8

Cantabile

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 115

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

MELODY 2.4.9

March style

MELODY 2.4.10

With intensity

MELODY 2.4.11

Lyrically

Improvise tonic harmony in the blank measure below: MELODY 2.4.12

Lento

115

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 116

116

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

MELODY 2.4.13

Geschwindt

Sing the perfect fourths between scale degrees 5 and 1 and 2 and 5 before attempting this melody. MELODY 2.4.14

Vif

MELODY 2.4.15

Adagio

stentando

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 117

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

Duets DUET 2.4.1

Andante

DUET 2.4.2

DUET 2.4.3

rit.

117

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 118

118

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

Chorale CHORALE 2.4

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 2.4

3

3

5 3 2

4 3 1

5

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 119

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

119

2.5 Major and Minor Sixths Major Sixths

Facts You Need to Know Major sixths are imperfect consonances. They occur in four places in the major scale: 1. From scale degree 5 up to 3 2. From scale degree 1 up to 6 3. From scale degree 2 up to 7 4. From scale degree 4 up to 2 Major sixths occur in four places in the minor scale: 1. From scale degree 3 up to 1 2. From scale degree 4 up to 2 3. From scale degree b6 up to 4 4. From scale degree b7 up to 5

Hearing When identifying major sixths, listen for: 1. Scale degree 5 as the lowest note, wanting to resolve up by a perfect fourth to tonic. 2. Scale degree 3 as the higher note, wanting to resolve down through scale degree 2 to tonic. 3. The complex sound of an imperfect consonance, with the pitches spread farther apart than a third.

Singing Use the major sixth that occurs in the major mode between scale degrees 5 and 3 as your point of reference. 1. When singing an ascending major sixth, hear your given pitch as scale degree 5. Sing the pattern for scale degree 5 to find tonic. (One of the alternate patterns may be more useful because it finds the tonic pitch in the middle of the interval.) 2. When singing a descending major sixth, hear your given pitch as scale degree 3. Sing the pattern for scale degree 3 to find tonic. 3. Orient yourself around tonic by singing a major scale or scale degree patterns.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 120

120

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

4. Find the other scale degree, either scale degree 3 above tonic or 5 below tonic. 5. Sing the scale degrees and interval quality and size. EXAMPLE 2.5.1

B

Sol Mi Ma - jor Sixth 5 3

B

Mi Sol Ma - jor Sixth 3 5

Minor Sixths

Facts You Need to Know Minor sixths are imperfect consonances. Minor sixths occur in three places in the major scale: 1. From scale degree 7 up to 5 2. From scale degree 3 up to 1 3. From scale degree 6 up to 4 Minor sixths occur in three places in the minor scale: 1. From scale degree #7 up to 5 2. From scale degree 5 up to 3 3. From scale degree 1 up to b6

Hearing Minor sixths are commonly heard in two ways: 1. As scale degrees 7 up to 5 in the major mode. 2. As scale degrees 5 up to 3 in the minor mode (mirroring the way we hear major sixths).

Singing Minor Sixths 1. Select which version of the minor sixth you want to use. 2. If ascending, hear the given pitch as scale degree 7 (or 5 in the minor mode) and sing its pattern to find tonic. If descending, hear the given pitch as scale degree 5 (or 3 in the minor mode) and sing its pattern to find tonic. If necessary, orient yourself around tonic by singing scale degrees. 3. Find the remaining note by hearing its scale degree pattern.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 121

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

4. Sing the scale degrees followed by the interval quality and size. EXAMPLE 2.5.2a

C

Ti Sol Mi-nor Sixth 7 5

C

Sol Ti Mi - nor Sixth 5 7

or EXAMPLE 2.5.2b

e

Sol Me Mi - nor Sixth 5 3

e

Me Sol Mi - nor Sixth 3 5

Assignments for Practice 1. Practice giving yourself a pitch and singing major and minor sixths above and below it. 2. Practice giving yourself a pitch and singing all of the intervals you have studied above and below it. 3. Listen for and identify major and minor sixths in music that you hear, sing, or practice.

Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 2.5.1

PITCH PATTERN 2.5.2

Melodies MELODY 2.5.1

Animato

121

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 122

122

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

MELODY 2.5.2

Lebhaft

MELODY 2.5.3

Allegretto

MELODY 2.5.4

Waltz tempo

MELODY 2.5.5

Smoothly

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 123

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

MELODY 2.5.6

Allegretto

MELODY 2.5.7

Andante

MELODY 2.5.8

Andante

MELODY 2.5.9

Lente

123

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 124

124

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

MELODY 2.5.10

Pesante

piu

MELODY 2.5.11

Allegro

MELODY 2.5.12

Allegro

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 125

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

MELODY 2.5.13

Andantino

Improvise tonic harmony in the blank measure below: MELODY 2.5.14

Lente

rit.

MELODY 2.5.15

Langsam

125

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 126

126

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

Duets DUET 2.5.1

Comodo

rit.

DUET 2.5.2

Joyfully

DUET 2.5.3

Adagio

rit.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 127

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

Chorale CHORALE 2.5

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 2.5

Sadly

127

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 128

128

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

2.6 Minor Triads in Root Position Facts You Need to Know Minor triads are often described as having a “dark,” “sad,” and stable sound. Consist of a minor third between the root and third, a major third between the third and fifth, and perfect fifth between the root and fifth. EXAMPLE 2.6.1

P5 M3

m3

g

Do 1

Me 3

Sol 5

Minor triads occur in three places in the major scale: 1. As the supertonic (ii) triad, consisting of scale degrees 2, 4, and 6. 2. As the mediant (iii) triad, consisting of scale degrees 3, 5, and 7. 3. As the submediant (vi) triad, consisting of scale degrees 6, 1, and 3. Minor triads occur in two places in the minor scale: 1. As the tonic (i) triad, consisting of scale degrees 1, 3, and 5. 2. As the subdominant (iv) triad, consisting of scale degrees 4, b6, and 1. Orderings for root position minor triads are the same as orderings for major triads.

Hearing 1. Listen for the dark, sad, and stable sound of the chord. 2. Listen for the component scale degrees. These will usually be 1, 3, and 5 in the minor mode, but be prepared that you could hear one of the other possibilities above.

Singing 1. Use the tonic (i) triad in the minor mode consisting of scale degrees 1, 3, and 5 as your point of reference. 2. Based on the ordering of the triad you are asked to sing, determine the scale degree of the pitch that was given to you. It should be either scale degree 1, 3, or 5.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 129

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

129

EXAMPLE 2.6.2

Sing this pattern to find tonic if your given pitch is the... third

root

Do 1

e

e

Me 3

fifth

Re 2

Do 1

Sol 5

e

Me 3

Do 1

3. If necessary, sing the scale degree pattern for this pitch to find tonic. 4. Orient yourself in this key by singing its scale degree patterns. 5. Sing the component scale degrees in the correct order. EXAMPLE 2.6.3

Do 1

e

Me 3

Sol 5

Mi - nor

Tri - ad

Assignments for Practice 1. Sing through all six orderings of a minor triad beginning on the same pitch. Notice how the character, sound, and energy of your given pitch changes as you move through the orderings. 2. Listen for minor triads in the music you hear and perform. EXAMPLE 2.6.4

First Ordering

Second Ordering

Do Me 1 3 Third Ordering

Sol 5

Do Sol 1 5 Fourth Ordering

Me 3

Me Do 3 1 Fifth Ordering

Sol 5

Me 3 Sixth Ordering

Sol 5

Do 1

Me 3

Do 1

b

g

e

Sol 5

Do 1

Me 3

b

g

e

Sol 5

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 130

130

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 2.6.1

PITCH PATTERN 2.6.2

Melodies Look closely to determine the modality of each melody. In addition to key signature, look at the first and last pitch and accidentals. Most (but not all) music in a minor key will use accidentals to raise the leading tone. Be aware that some of these melodies may be in the major mode. MELODY 2.6.1

Con caloroso

MELODY 2.6.2

Sadly

rit.

Improvise tonic harmony in the blank measures opposite:

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 131

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

MELODY 2.6.3

Allegretto

MELODY 2.6.4

Allegretto

Improvise tonic harmony in the blank measures below: MELODY 2.6.5

Allegro

MELODY 2.6.6

Animato

131

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 132

132

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

MELODY 2.6.7

Quickly

decrescendo

crescendo

crescendo

MELODY 2.6.8

Mässig

MELODY 2.6.9

Allegretto

MELODY 2.6.10

Animé

cresc.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 133

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

133

Improvise tonic harmony in the first two measures of the following melody. What do the combined articulation markings in measures 5 and 6 mean? MELODY 2.6.11

Largo

rallentando a tempo

molto cresc.

MELODY 2.6.12

Animato

dim.

MELODY 2.6.13

Slowly and smoothly

smorzando

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 134

134

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

MELODY 2.6.14

Grazioso

MELODY 2.6.15

Lebhaft

Duets DUET 2.6.1

Moving along

cresc.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 135

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

DUET 2.6.2

Briskly

DUET 2.6.3

Moderately

Chorale CHORALE 2.6

Andante

135

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 136

136

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 2.6

Vivace

con brio

Vivace

2.7 Major and Minor Triads in Inversion Facts You Need to Know Triads possess three identifiers: root, quality, and inversion. We have already examined root position major and minor triads in this text. Triads contain three chord members: the root, the third, and the fifth. The inversion of a triad is determined by which of the three chord members occurs as the lowest pitch. When the root of the chord is the lowest pitch, it is in root position. When the third of the chord is the lowest pitch, it is in first inversion. When the fifth of the chord is the lowest pitch, it is in second inversion. The placement of the pitches above the bass note has no impact on the inversion of the triad. The following chords are all in first inversion: EXAMPLE 2.7.1

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 137

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

137

Hearing Inverted Triads When listening to triads, begin by listening for quality. At present, we have studied only major and minor triads. Inverted triads generally retain the same general sound that identifies them as major or minor—bright and cheery for major or dark and sad for minor. Next, listen for the scale degree of the bass or lowest pitch (triads can be in six orderings, so the lowest pitch might not always be the first pitch you hear). Taken out of context, root position triads will sound like scale degree 1 in the bass, first inversion will sound like scale degree 3 in the bass, and second inversion will sound like scale degree 5 in the bass. Verify your answer by listening for the amount of stability in the triad—root position are most stable, first inversion have some instability, and second inversion have a lot of instability and sound like the upper pitches want to fall over into a more stable triad. Play the chords below to compare the sounds of the triadic inversions: EXAMPLE 2.7.2

Root Position

First Inversion

Second Inversion

Indicate your answer by providing the quality (M or m) and inversion (using inversional symbol—nothing for root position, “6” for first inversion, and “64 ” for second inversion.

Singing 1. Determine the given pitch based on the information given to you. If you are asked to sing a root position triad, hear the given pitch as tonic; with first inversion it is scale degree 3, and with second inversion it is scale degree 5. 2. If necessary, find tonic and sing through the scale degree patterns in the correct mode to set up the key. 3. Sing the component scale degrees in the correct order. EXAMPLE 2.7.3

d

Do 1

Me 3

Sol 5

Me 3

Sol 5

Do 1

Sol 5

Do 1

Me 3

Assignments for Practice 1. Practice singing root position, first inversion, and second inversion major and minor triads using the same starting pitch.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 138

138

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

2. Sing through all six orderings of an inverted triad. Remember that ordering deals only with the placement of the high, middle, and low pitches in a triad.

Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 2.7.1

PITCH PATTERN 2.7.2

Melodies Find the triads in the following melodies. Identify their inversions and their component scale degrees. Remember to maintain their integrity by singing each pitch as a scale degree. MELODY 2.7.1

Allegro con brio

MELODY 2.7.2

Andante cantabile

MELODY 2.7.3

Adagio

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 139

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

MELODY 2.7.4

Moderato

MELODY 2.7.5

Schnell

MELODY 2.7.6

Langsam

Describe the contour of the following melody and come up with two ways of bringing out that shape.

139

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 140

140

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

MELODY 2.7.7

Allegro

MELODY 2.7.8

Moderato

MELODY 2.7.9

Mässig

MELODY 2.7.10

Mässig

rit.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 141

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

MELODY 2.7.11

Adagio

rit.

MELODY 2.7.12

Lebhaft

rit.

Improvise tonic harmony in the blank measure below: MELODY 2.7.13

Tempo di menuetto

MELODY 2.7.14

Presto

141

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 142

142

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

What is a habanera? And what do you need to do to bring out this quality in the music? MELODY 2.7.15

Tempo di habanera

Duets DUET 2.7.1

Andantino

DUET 2.7.2

Belebt

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 143

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

DUET 2.7.3

Moderato

Chorale CHORALE 2.7

143

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 144

144

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 2.7

Behaglich

cantabile

Behaglich

cantabile

züruckhaltend

2.8 Music from the Literature EXAMPLE 2.8.1

“The Doll's Burial,” from Album for the Young, Op. 39, No. 7 Grave

Tchaikovsky

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 145

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

145

EXAMPLE 2.8.2

Lento non troppo

Finnish Folk Song

EXAMPLE 2.8.3 Polish Folk Song

Moderato

EXAMPLE 2.8.4 Scandinavian Folk Song

Slowly and sadly

cresc.

dim. EXAMPLE 2.8.5

Romantic Story Andantino

Gurlitt

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 146

146

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

EXAMPLE 2.8.6

Violin Concerto in A Minor, Op. 3, No.6, Second movement Vivaldi

Largo

o cantabile e molto sentit

EXAMPLE 2.8.7

“Erstarrung,” from Winterreise Vivace assai

Schubert

EXAMPLE 2.8.8

Andante

cresc.

Latin American Folk Song

dim.

EXAMPLE 2.8.9

Moderato

German Folk Song

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 147

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

147

EXAMPLE 2.8.10

Piano Sonata in E-flat Major, K. 282, Second movement, opening Adagio

Mozart

EXAMPLE 2.8.11

Aus den hebräischen Gesängen, Op. 25, No. 3 Sehr langsam

Schumann

EXAMPLE 2.8.12 British Folk Song

Moderato grazioso

dim.

EXAMPLE 2.8.13 Sonatina in C Major, Op. 36, No. 1, Second movement Clementi

cresc.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 148

148

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

EXAMPLE 2.8.14

Rondeau, from Partita in C Minor

J.S. Bach

EXAMPLE 2.8.15

“I Attempt from Love's Sickness,” from The Indian Queen Purcell

EXAMPLE 2.8.16

Pietá, Signore! Andantino

Alessandro Stradella

cresc.

EXAMPLE 2.8.17

An den Sonnenschein, Op. 36, No. 4 Im Volkston

Schumann

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 149

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

149

EXAMPLE 2.8.18

Quadrille Allegretto

Haydn

Reflections: Professionalism Professionalism is a set of attitudes and behaviors that are expected from practitioners of any field. This time of your life—your collegiate music study—is a time when you need to be learning and practicing the behaviors that are expected of musicians. Musicians must be conversant in the multiple languages, styles, philosophies, structures, and idioms in which they are expected to perform. You must be able to understand musical systems well enough to enable you to transpose music to any key on the night of a performance, stylistically improvise a part within an ensemble, and musically realize a composer’s or conductor’s verbal instructions quickly and accurately. Musicians must also understand how the music field works. Whether it involves networking with other musicians, understanding contracts, marketing yourself to contractors, or collaborating with other professionals, musicians must find and understand their place and obligations within the wider musical community. Musicians are expected to demonstrate personal integrity, or a firm adherence to a set of values relating to ethical behavior and artistic excellence. Values such as honesty, forthrightness, and sincerity are essential for forming and maintaining relationships that will sustain your reputation and career. Professionals do not take ethical short cuts such as representing someone else’s work or ideas as their own or presenting un- or under-prepared work. Artistic integrity is the adherence to a strict set of principles that govern how you will make artistic decisions. It also includes the principle that you will never let yourself make an unprepared or unmusical sound in any performance, whether for a teacher or an audience. Musicians are also expected to perform acceptably well, even on their worst day. This characteristic is only developed one way—through diligent, regular, and efficiently directed practice. A professional demonstrates self-respect through taking care of his or her mind and body. These characteristics are key for longevity in a career, and they ensure that you will be ready to perform artistically and effectively when the next professional opportunity comes along. Confidence is an expression of self-respect and is only genuinely acquired through competence. It is the foundation on which all of your musical skills will rest, allowing you to develop a deeper and significant presence in the community of musicians. As musicians, we are constantly being told to find and correct our performance mistakes and to take extraordinary measures to make improvements to our performance. We

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 150

are also constantly reminded of intense competition for jobs that we can only attain through demonstrating that we are “better” than other musicians in a competitive audition. In such an environment, it is very easy to lose sight of three important facts: 1. One’s goal should be constant improvement, not perfection (which is unattainable anyway). 2. You wouldn’t be where you are today if you weren’t doing many things correctly—force yourself to focus on the positive and aim to transform the negatives into positives (instead of just identifying what is wrong). 3. Ultimately, we make music from and for ourselves, as a way of sharing what is most precious and unique within our souls. Professional musicians manage their lives and obligations with responsibility and accountability. This includes being able to accomplish all of the multiple tasks you need to get done, including school work, practice, rehearsal, performance, personal tasks, and other jobs. No matter what the obligation, you need to make time to do it to the best of your ability. More importantly, you need to be able to prioritize and take inventory of your obligations and be able to say no to those that are less significant, or fulfilling others when you can. Accountability deals with establishing and maintaining the confidence that others can depend on you. It involves the ability to make and keep commitments (like showing up for rehearsals and performances) and the establishment of a standard of excellence. Music is fundamentally about communication. As important as communicating in one’s artistic medium is the ability to communicate about one’s artistic medium through speaking and writing. In practice and rehearsal, you must be able to articulate where problems are occurring and offer concrete suggestions for correction. Most musicians make a substantial part of their living through teaching, which in essence is a highly refined form of directed communication. You are also an ambassador for the styles of music that you perform. You must be able to effectively communicate the relevance, necessity, and joy of what you do. Professionals have a strong interest in making sure that their art and craft continue to develop. Most people begin their musical study with the belief that music is the vehicle through which they will fulfill their career aspirations. Professionals soon come to realize that just as music serves them, they have a responsibility to serve the art. This involves being an advocate for high-quality musical experiences, providing opportunities for the continued development and growth of your art, and adherence to the highest standards of performance and ethical behavior.

2.9 Dictation Materials I. Identification of Minor Scale Degrees

Your teacher will establish a key and then play its scale degrees in random order or as a specific pitch in a melody (by number—first, second, last, or by position—high or low). Identify each by writing its number in the appropriate space. Place an up arrow in front of scale degree 6 or 7 if you hear either of them in their raised position. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 151

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

151

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ II. Identification of Major Scale Degrees

Your teacher will establish a key and then play its scale degrees in random order or as a specific pitch in a melody (by number—first, second, last, or by position—high or low). Identify each by writing its number in the appropriate space. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ III. Interval Identification

Your teacher will play several intervals. Identify their quality and size as one of the following: M2 = Major second m2 = Minor second M3 = Major third m3 = Minor third

P4 = Perfect fourth P5 = Perfect fifth M6 = Major sixth m6 = Minor sixth

P8 = Perfect octave X = Other

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 152

152

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

Be sure to make a clear difference between your capital and lower-case Ms. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ IV. Meter Identification

Your teacher will play several melodies. Listen for the metric division and number. Write a logical meter signature for each example. Possible answers are 24 , 34 , 44 , 22 , 68 , 98 , 128 or “X” for other. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 153

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

V. Melodic and Rhythmic Dictation

Your teacher will play a short melody or rhythm. Notate it on the staves below. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

153

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 154

154

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Compound Meters, Ties and Dots; The Minor Mode, Inverted Triads

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 155

Chapter 3

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

3.1 Changing Meter I: Simple Changing Meter Facts You Need to Know Simple changing meter refers to meter changes that occur between measures that have the same beatnote value, such as 43 to 44 or 68 to 89. The African American folk song “The Swallow” is an example of simple changing meter: EXAMPLE 3.1.1

Lit - tle swal - low,

Lit - tle swal - low,

fly to your nest,

fly

to your nest,

Who goes there, fly a fly a - way now.

fly

a

fly

a

-

way.

Changing meter is essentially a study of metric integrity. When performing a piece that involves changing meter, it is essential to maintain the character of each individual meter, so that the listener can discern the metric stresses. Hemiola (a rhythmic device where three groups of two are superimposed over two groups of three, or vice versa) is a common manifestation of changing meter. Unlike typical changing meter examples, the meter changes are shown through the phrasing or articulation, rather than written out. Measures 5–6 in the melody below, from the third movement of Ravel’s Valses Nobles et Sentimentales, is an example of hemiola: EXAMPLE 3.1.2

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 156

156

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

Rhythms Practice these rhythms first by just conducting; add the rhythm after you feel confident with the conducting pattern changes. RHYTHM 3.1.1

With integrity

RHYTHM 3.1.2

Andante

RHYTHM 3.1.3

Allegro

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 157

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

RHYTHM 3.1.4

Con brio

RHYTHM 3.1.5

Meekly

RHYTHM 3.1.6

With energy

RHYTHM 3.1.7

Modéré

157

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 158

158

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

RHYTHM 3.1.8

Moderato

RHYTHM 3.1.9

Vif

RHYTHM 3.1.10

Moderato

RHYTHM 3.1.11

Vif

Improvise a rhythm to fit with the metric structure opposite. Try to repeat rhythmic elements to unify your improvisation.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 159

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

RHYTHM 3.1.12

Choose your own tempo and style

Two-part Rhythms TWO-PART RHYTHM 3.1.1

Quickly

TWO-PART RHYTHM 3.1.2

Adagio

Three-part Rhythm THREE-PART RHYTHM 3.1

Geschwindt

159

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

160

Page 160

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

3.2 Second Division of the Beat in Compound Meter Facts You Need to Know Second division of the beat in compound meter occurs when the eighth-note division of the beat is doubled, as shown in the example below: EXAMPLE 3.2.1

Beat

First Division

Second Division

A phenomenon unique to second division in compound meter is that it combines both binary and ternary groupings. By definition, the beat in compound meter is divided into three parts (ternary structure), but each of those divisions is divided into only two parts (binary structure). Thus, there is a simple beat structure within compound meter. The result of this phenomenon is that, depending on the articulation, melodic structure, and harmonic outline, the sixteenths can be perceived in a variety of ways. Below, the first beat in the measure shows a melodic arpeggiation of rhythmic figure, and the second, a primarily stepwise figure. The effect of the melodic structure gives a sense of line and sweep to the pattern. The listener hears a strong sense of the beat decorated by figuration, making the underlying (or outlining) rhythm figure the beat. EXAMPLE 3.2.2

The next example results in a completely different perception of the same rhythm. The two-note slurs outline the sense of the eighth-note division; thus, the underlying rhythm becomes the division of the beat. EXAMPLE 3.2.3

In the following example, the melodic structure divides the sixteenths into two groups of three, creating a hemiola effect between the divisions and melodic outline. EXAMPLE 3.2.4

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 161

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

161

Preparatory Exercises Practice each of the following rhythms in preparation for reading more complex rhythms that use second division of the beat in compound meter. Always clap the divisions while you articulate the rhythm; they will provide a guidepost as you perform the rhythm. You may find it helpful to count divisions or subdivisions while you clap; those numbers are provided underneath the rhythms. EXAMPLE 3.2.5

1

2 3 4

5

6

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6

Count with “a’s” or without; in either case, line up the rhythms with the eighth-note divisions. EXAMPLE 3.2.6

1 a 2 a 3 1 a 2 a 3

1 2 a 3 a 1 2 a 3 a

EXAMPLE 3.2.7

1 a 2 3

1 2 a 3

1 2 3 a

Look carefully at the rhythms below. Perform each by clapping the divisions and articulating the rhythm. Listen for accurate placement of the sixteenth note in the dotted-eighth-sixteenth figure below. EXAMPLE 3.2.8

1 2 a

3

Notice that the sixteenth notes start on and not in between the divisions in the rhythm below. EXAMPLE 3.2.9

1 2 3

a

EXAMPLE 3.2.10

1 2 a 3 a

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 162

162

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

EXAMPLE 3.2.11

1 a 2 a 3

Rhythms RHYTHM 3.2.1

Allegro

RHYTHM 3.2.2

Adagio

RHYTHM 3.2.3

Slowly

rit.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 163

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

RHYTHM 3.2.4

Langsam

dim.

RHYTHM 3.2.5

Vif

RHYTHM 3.2.6

Charmingly

RHYTHM 3.2.7

Andante

rit.

163

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 164

164

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

RHYTHM 3.2.8

Allegretto

RHYTHM 3.2.9

Moderato

allargando

RHYTHM 3.2.10

Allegro moderato

Two-part Rhythms TWO-PART RHYTHM 3.2.1

Con moto

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 165

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

TWO-PART RHYTHM 3.2.2

Comodo

TWO-PART RHYTHM 3.2.3

Andante cantabile

Three-part Rhythm THREE-PART RHYTHM 3.2

Allegro moderato

165

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 166

166

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

3.3 Minor Sevenths and Tritones Minor Sevenths

Facts You Need to Know Minor sevenths are wide and dissonant intervals. Minor sevenths occur in five places in the major scale: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Between scale degrees 5 and 4 Between scale degrees 2 and 1 Between scale degrees 3 and 2 Between scale degrees 6 and 5 Between scale degrees 7 and 6

Minor sevenths occur in seven places in the minor scale: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Between scale degrees 1 and b7 Between scale degrees 2 and 1 Between scale degrees 4 and 3 Between scale degrees 5 and 4 Between scale degrees #6 and 5 Between scale degrees b7 and b6 Between scale degrees #7 and #6

Minor sevenths most commonly appear as scale degrees 5 and 4. These intervals strongly suggest a dominant sound because they are the root and seventh of the dominant seventh chord.

Hearing Begin by hearing the strong dominant sound of the interval. You will likely want to hear the top pitch resolving down by step to scale degree 3 and the bottom leaping up a perfect fourth to scale degree 1. EXAMPLE 3.3.1

F

Fa 4

Mi 3

Sol 5

Do 1

When played harmonically, listen for the interval’s dissonant quality and wide spacing.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 167

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

167

Singing Use scale degrees 5 to 4 in the major mode as your point of reference. If ascending, hear the given pitch as scale degree 5. Sing an alternate pattern to find tonic. If necessary, orient yourself around this tonic pitch. Hear the higher pitch as scale degree 4. Sing the interval quality and size. EXAMPLE 3.3.2

A

Sol Fa Mi - nor Sev - enth 5 4

If descending, hear the given pitch as scale degree 4. Sing its scale degree pattern to find tonic. If necessary, orient yourself around this tonic pitch. Hear the lower pitch as scale degree 5. Sing the interval quality and size. EXAMPLE 3.3.3

A

Fa Sol Mi - nor Sev - enth 4 5

Tritones

Facts You Need to Know Tritones are very strong intervals of medium width. Tritones occur in two places in the major mode: 1. Between scale degrees 4 and 7 (as an augmented fourth) 2. Between scale degrees 7 and 4 (as a diminished fifth) Tritones occur in four places in the minor mode: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Between scale degrees 4 and #7 (as an augmented fourth) Between scale degrees #7 and 4 (as a diminished fifth) Between scale degrees 2 and b6 (as a diminished fifth) Between scale degrees b6 and 2 (as an augmented fourth)

The tritone is one of the most defining elements of a dominant seventh chord.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 168

168

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

Hearing Listen for a middle-sized, dissonant interval. Hear both pitches wanting to resolve by half step either in on each other or out away from each other. EXAMPLE 3.3.4

F

Fa 4

Mi 3

Ti 7

Do 1

B

Ti 7

Do 1

Fa 4

Mi 3

Singing Use scale degrees 7 and 4 in the major mode as your point of reference. Hear the given pitch as scale degree 7. Sing its pattern to find tonic, then orient yourself around this pitch. Find scale degree 4 above or below tonic, depending on the direction of the interval. Sing the interval quality and size. EXAMPLE 3.3.5

B

Ti Fa Tri- tone 7 4

B

Fa Ti Tri - tone 4 7

Assignments for Practice 1. Practice giving yourself a pitch and singing minor sevenths and tritones above and below it. 2. Practice giving yourself a pitch and singing all of the intervals you have studied above and below it. 3. Listen for and identify minor sevenths and tritones in music that you hear, sing, or practice.

Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 3.3.1

PITCH PATTERN 3.3.2

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 169

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

Melodies MELODY 3.3.1

Moderato

MELODY 3.3.2

Moderately fast

Mysterioso

MELODY 3.3.3

Vif

MELODY 3.3.4

Grave

MELODY 3.3.5

Allegro non troppo

169

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 170

170

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

MELODY 3.3.6

Largo

MELODY 3.3.7

Andante

MELODY 3.3.8

Mässig

rallentando

MELODY 3.3.9

With good cheer

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 171

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

171

MELODY 3.3.10

Driving forward

MELODY 3.3.11

Dolente

cantabile

MELODY 3.3.12

Andante

piu

What structural characteristic of the second half of this melody makes it easier to sing, despite all of the wide leaps? MELODY 3.3.13

Moderately

with intensity

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 172

172

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

Where is the focal point of the following melody? How do the minor sevenths that precede it heighten the sense of musical expectation? MELODY 3.3.14

Comodo

MELODY 3.3.15

Con forza

piu

Duets DUET 3.3.1

Moderato

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 173

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

DUET 3.3.2

Nicht zu schnell

detached

DUET 3.3.3

Mysteriously

173

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 174

174

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

Chorale CHORALE 3.3

Allegretto

cresc.

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 3.3

Andante espressivo

Andante espressivo

rit.

rit.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 175

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

175

3.4 Dominant Seventh Chords Facts You Need to Know Dominant seventh chords are one of the most tonally defining sounds in music. Most people know where tonic is after hearing only a dominant seventh chord. They occur on scale degree 5 in both the major and minor mode, and consist of scale degree 5, 7, 2, and 4. The interval structure of a dominant seventh chord appears below: EXAMPLE 3.4.1

m7 P5 M3

m3

M3

d5 Each tone in a dominant seventh chord has a strong desire to resolve in a particular way: EXAMPLE 3.4.2

Sol (Scale Degree 5)

B

Stays on Sol (5) if not in bass Leaps to Do (1) if in bass

V7

Steps up to Do (1) Sometimes leaps down to Sol (5) if in an inner voice

Fa (Scale Degree 4)

Re (Scale Degree 2)

Usually steps down to Do (1) Sometimes steps up to Mi or Me (3)

Ti (Scale Degree 7)

Steps down to Mi or Me (3)

Like all seventh chords, dominant sevenths are invertible three times: EXAMPLE 3.4.3

D

Sol 5

Ti 7

Re 2

Fa 4

D

Ti 7

Re 2

Fa 4

Sol 5

D

Re 2

Fa 4

Sol 5

Ti 7

D

Fa 4

Sol 5

Ti 7

Re 2

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

176

13:30

Page 176

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

Hearing 1. Dominant sevenths are very energetic chords with a strong desire toward resolution. Begin by hearing this desire toward motion. 2. To determine the chord inversion, listen for the scale degree that occurs in the bass. Hear where it wants to resolve. If you hear the bass pitch wanting to leap up or down a fourth to tonic, then scale degree 5 is in the bass and the chord is in root position (V7). If you hear the bass pitch stepping up to tonic, then scale degree 7 is in the bass and the chord is in first inversion (V65 ). If you hear the bass pitch stepping down to tonic, then scale degree 2 is in the bass and the chord is in second inversion (V43 ). If you hear the bass pitch stepping down to scale degree 3, then scale degree 4 is in the bass and the chord is in third inversion (V42 ). Be careful! The desire of the bass pitch in second and third inversion dominant seventh chords can sound very similar. Pay particular attention to whether the bass pitch is stepping down to tonic or scale degree 3. If you are asked to identify another pitch in the dominant seventh chord, the scale degrees behave the same way with the exception of scale degree 5. It will stay on the same pitch on the resolution if it is in an upper voice.

Singing Dominant seventh chords use scale degrees 5, 7, 2, and 4, whether in the major or minor mode. When given a bass pitch and a chord inversion: 1. Know which scale degree the given pitch represents based on the given inversion. V7 (root position) means the given pitch is scale degree 5. V65 means the given pitch is scale degree 7. V43 means the given pitch is scale degree 2. V42 means the given pitch is scale degree 4. 2. Find tonic by singing the pattern for the starting scale degree. If necessary, set yourself up in the key by singing all of the scale degree patterns (pay attention to whether you are in the major or minor mode). 3. Once you are comfortably in the key, sing the pattern below that corresponds to the chord inversion you have been asked to sing. If you have been asked to resolve to a tonic, sing the resolution that follows:

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 177

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

177

EXAMPLE 3.4.4

Root Position (V 7 )

A/a

D/d

Sol Ti Re Fa Mi/Me Re Do 5 7 2 4 3 2 1 Second Inversion (V 34 )

Re Fa Sol Ti Do Sol Mi/Me Do 2 4 5 7 1 5 3 1

First Inversion (V 65 )

F/f Ti Re Fa Sol Sol Mi/Me Do

7 2 4 5 5 3 Third Inversion (V 42 )

1

B/b Fa Sol Ti Re Do Sol Mi/Me Do

4 5

7 2

1

5

3

1

Assignments for Practice 1. Sing all four inversions of the dominant seventh chord from the same pitch. 2. Sing the dominant seventh chords above and then reorder the pitches. Pay attention to the integrity of the dominant sound.

Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 3.4.1

PITCH PATTERN 3.4.2

Melodies Find the dominant seventh chords in each melody before singing. After you learn the melody as written, sing it again but reorder the pitches of the dominant seventh chord. MELODY 3.4.1

Andante

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 178

178

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

MELODY 3.4.2

Allegretto

MELODY 3.4.3

Adagio

MELODY 3.4.4

Andante cantabile

rit.

MELODY 3.4.5

Elegantly

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 179

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

MELODY 3.4.6

Lento

MELODY 3.4.7

Moderato

rit.

MELODY 3.4.8

Nicht zu schnell

MELODY 3.4.9

Adagietto

rit.

179

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 180

180

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

MELODY 3.4.10

Vite

MELODY 3.4.11

Tenderly

MELODY 3.4.12

Misterioso

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 181

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

MELODY 3.4.13

Rasch

leicht

MELODY 3.4.14

Grazioso

faster

MELODY 3.4.15

Briskly

rit.

181

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

182

Page 182

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

Duets DUET 3.4.1

Presto

DUET 3.4.2

Winsomely

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 183

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

DUET 3.4.3

Larghetto

Chorale CHORALE 3.4

Winsomely

183

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

184

13:30

Page 184

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 3.4

Con brio

Con brio

3.5 Diminished Triads Facts You Need to Know Diminished triads occur in one place in the major scale: as the leading tone (vii°) triad consisting of scale degrees 7, 2, and 4. Diminished triads occur in two places in the minor scale: 1. As the leading tone (vii°) triad consisting of scale degrees #7, 2, and 4. 2. As the supertonic (ii°) triad consisting of scale degrees 2, 4, and b6. Diminished triads consist of minor thirds between the root and third and between the third and fifth. The root and fifth form a diminished fifth (tritone).

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 185

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

185

EXAMPLE 3.5.1

d5 m3

m3

F

Ti 7

Re 2

Fa 4

Leading tone triads carry dominant function. The supertonic triad in minor carries predominant function. Leading tone triads behave like dominant seventh chords that are missing their root. As a result, the resolution of the chord tones is the same as for a dominant seventh chord: Scale degree 7 moves up by step to scale degree 1. Scale degree 2 moves down by step to scale degree 1 or up by step to scale degree 3. (This is the only tone in this chord that can be doubled. If more than one scale degree 2 is used, one will move up by step and the other will move down by step.) Scale degree 4 moves down by step to scale degree 3. EXAMPLE 3.5.2

Ti (Scale Degree 7)

Re (Scale Degree 2)

Fa (Scale Degree 4)

Steps up to Do (1)

Steps up to Mi/Me (3) or down to Do (1)

Steps down to Mi or Me (3)

Hearing Most people hear diminished triads as dominant function chords. Listen for the strong desire of resolution to tonic and the individual tones’ desires toward resolution to scale degrees 1 and 3. To determine inversion, listen for the scale degree in the bass by hearing its desire toward resolution.

Singing 1. Use the leading tone triad (scale degrees 7, 2, and 4) in the major mode as your point of reference. 2. Determine the scale degree of your given pitch based on the requested inversion. Root position triads will begin on scale degree 7, first inversion on scale degree 2, and second inversion on scale degree 4. 3. Use scale degree patterns to find tonic; orient yourself around tonic. 4. Sing the component scale degrees. If you are asked to resolve the triad to tonic, use the following patterns:

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 186

186

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

EXAMPLE 3.5.3

G/g

Ti Re Fa Mi/Me Re Do 7 2 4 3 2 1

E/e

Re Fa Ti Do Sol Mi/Me Do C /c Fa Ti Re Do Sol Mi/Me Do 2 4 7 1 5 3 1 4 7 2 1 5 3 1

Assignments for Practice 1. Give yourself a pitch and sing root position and first inversion diminished triads from it. 2. Resolve root position and first inversion diminished triads to both major and minor tonics. 3. Hear a diminished triad as supertonic in the minor key and resolve it through a dominant seventh chord to tonic. EXAMPLE 3.5.4

a

ii°

V 43

i

Re Fa Le 2 4 6

Re Fa Sol Ti Do Sol Me Re Do 2 4 5 7 1 5 3 2 1

4. Sing through the three triadic qualities you have studied so far in rapid succession. Listen for the differences in sound and resolution as you sing the different triads. 5. Change the ordering of the pitches in your diminished triads and see if you can maintain the chord sound and integrity.

Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 3.5.1

PITCH PATTERN 3.5.2

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 187

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

Melodies MELODY 3.5.1

Moderato

MELODY 3.5.2

Maestoso

MELODY 3.5.3

Allegro

sempre leggiero rallentando

MELODY 3.5.4

Animato

187

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 188

188

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

MELODY 3.5.5

Piu lento

Provide your own tempo and style marking for the following melody. MELODY 3.5.6

MELODY 3.5.7

Happily

MELODY 3.5.8

Grazioso

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 189

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

MELODY 3.5.9

Moderato

MELODY 3.5.10

Waltzing

MELODY 3.5.11

Lento

189

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 190

190

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

MELODY 3.5.12

Vite

MELODY 3.5.13

Mässig

Pay attention to dynamics as you learn this melody. MELODY 3.5.14

Allegro con moto

cresc.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 191

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

MELODY 3.5.15

Andante

Duets DUET 3.5.1

DUET 3.5.2

Con moto

191

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

192

DUET 3.5.3

Chorale CHORALE 3.5

Page 192

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 193

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

193

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 3.5

Lively

Lively

3.6 Improvisation II: Dominant Function Facts You Need to Know Dominant function chords are the same in the major and minor modes: 1. Dominant triads (V) and seventh chords (V7) 2. Leading tone triads (viiø) and seventh chords (vii°7 and vii°7) Inverting chords does not change their function. Dominant function chords all share scale degrees 7 and 2. Other important dominant sounding scale degrees are 5 and 4. When singing dominant function, the movable scale degrees in the minor mode are usually placed in their raised position (#6 and #7). Dominant function chords must resolve to tonic function chords—usually tonic (I or i) and sometimes the submediant (vi or VI).

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

194

Page 194

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

Hearing Dominant function chords possess a strong desire toward resolution. Listen for this energy that pulls the music to tonic. Listen also for the presence of scale degrees 7 and 2. To determine the specific dominant chord being used, listen for chord quality and inversion.

Singing When improvising dominant function, focus on singing scale degrees 5, 7, 2, and 4. On occasion scale degree 6 (b6 in the minor mode) may be added. Use the same three techniques for improvisation that you used for tonic function: 1. Repetition EXAMPLE 3.6.1

Semplice

Dominant Harmony

2. Arpeggiation EXAMPLE 3.6.2

Semplice

Dominant Harmony

3. Connected arpeggiation EXAMPLE 3.6.3

Semplice

Dominant Harmony

Be aware of the amount of time that you have to fill. Keep counting! Notice that you are always on or next to a note that carries dominant function. Use this to smooth the transition into and out of your improvisation. For example, if the note before your improvisation is scale degree 3, begin on 2 or 4. If the note after your improvisation is scale degree 1, end on 7 or 2.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 195

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

195

As always, use rhythmic and melodic components from elsewhere in the melody to help make your improvisation fit into the sound of the melody.

Assignments for Practice 1. Give yourself a pitch and sing a major triad above it (you may vary the inversion). Hear it as a dominant triad, and find a logical way to resolve it to a tonic triad. 2. Repeat exercise #1, but resolve the dominant triad deceptively (to the submediant).

Melodies Improvise dominant harmony in the blank measures of the melodies. MELODY 3.6.1

Modéré

MELODY 3.6.2

Vif

MELODY 3.6.3

Allegro

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 196

196

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

MELODY 3.6.4

Moderato

MELODY 3.6.5

Adagio

Improvise tonic or dominant harmony as indicated in the blank measures below. MELODY 3.6.6

Allegretto

(tonic)

(dominant )

(dominant )

MELODY 3.6.7

Allegretto

(tonic)

(dominant )

(tonic)

(dominant )

(tonic)

The following melodies present a phrase that uses only tonic and dominant harmony. Complete each by improvising a second phrase that relates to and completes the first.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 197

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

MELODY 3.6.8

Andante

MELODY 3.6.9

Allegro

MELODY 3.6.10

Geschwindt

Duets DUET 3.6.1

197

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 198

198

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

DUET 3.6.2 Belebt

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 3.6 Larghetto

Larghetto

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 199

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

199

3.7 Music from the Literature EXAMPLE 3.7.1

“Das Wandern,” from Die schöne Müllerin Allegro moderato

Schubert

EXAMPLE 3.7.2

“Mit dem grünen Lautenband,” from Die schöne Müllerin

Schubert

Moderato

EXAMPLE 3.7.3

From Song Without Words, Op. 30, No. 1 Andante espressivo

dim.

Mendelssohn

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 200

200

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

EXAMPLE 3.7.4 “Le Violette,” from Pierro et Demetrio

Allegretto

Alessandro Scarlatti

rit. EXAMPLE 3.7.5 Violin Concerto in A Minor, Op. 3, No. 6, Third movement

Presto

Vivaldi

largemente

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 201

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

EXAMPLE 3.7.6 Russian Folk Song

Maestoso

dim. cresc.

EXAMPLE 3.7.7

“The Happy Farmer,” from Album for the Young, Op. 68, No. 10 Brisk and happy

Schumann

EXAMPLE 3.7.8

Briskly

Tyrolian Folk Song

cresc.

201

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 202

202

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

EXAMPLE 3.7.9

Marcia pomposa

Finnish Folk Song

EXAMPLE 3.7.10

“Sebben crudele,” from La constanza in amor vince l’inganno Allegretto grazioso

Antonio Caldera

rit. EXAMPLE 3.7.11

Moderato

Swedish Folk Song

dim.

cresc.

EXAMPLE 3.7.12

Gavotte Moderato

Benjamin Carr

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 203

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

203

EXAMPLE 3.7.13 “I Attempt from Love’s Sickness,” from The Indian Queen Purcell

EXAMPLE 3.7.14

Piano Sonata in E-flat Major, Third movement Presto

Haydn

EXAMPLE 3.7.15

m. 32–39 Allegro

Piano Sonata in F Major, K. 547a, First movement Mozart

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

204

13:30

Page 204

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

Reflections: Musicality “I can’t believe you haven’t heard about it yet!” Which word did you emphasize when you read this sentence? Repeat it, consciously emphasizing a different word. How did the meaning change? Try it again. Be incredulous, angry, happy, sarcastic. What did you do to infuse the sentence with a different meaning? One inflection may make it seem as if you’re talking to someone with a reputation for being “in the know”; with another, it might seem like you are delivering bad news. But why does it matter, and what does any of this have to do with studying music? It matters because how you say something is as important as what you say; it is essential that you are able to communicate your intentions when you speak. The same is true in music. From our earliest training, we learn to play the notes on the page, but how we play them—how we communicate—is the essence of music making. It’s what musicians call musicality, and it is one of the most alluring aspects of being a musician. Think about the times, at a recital, when you think to yourself “Wow—her playing was so musical!” What makes us react that way? Somehow, we become aware of how the performer has connected to the music. The artist, wholly engrossed in the message, is compelled to communicate his emotions to the audience, and the audience is equally compelled to react: that’s the power and magic of musicality. Musicality grows from passion, and passion feeds musicality. As artists, we have the need to express ourselves; we have the means to do so through music; we have the power to do so when we decide to take risks, challenge ourselves, and use our musical imaginations in new and inventive ways. It is easy to understand and embrace the idea of musicality as it relates to performance on an instrument. Most musicians have spent a large part of their lives learning to express musical ideas and emotions on their instrument or their voice. But why does a chapter on musicality exist in an ear-training text? Can you, an aspiring musician, train your ear without regard to musicality? Probably, but do you want to? Devoid of musical intention, studying ear training will have little meaning to your musical life and development. Ear training is not a part of the curriculum in music schools across the country because administrators and professors want to find a way to torture students! It’s there because it has an enormous impact on the development of musical skills, has the potential to strengthen your sensitivity to sound, and can cultivate your ability to communicate subtle shades of musical meaning. As you develop your sensitivity to sound, you will find yourself hearing music in a completely different way and responding to sound with newfound energy and knowledge. The more musical integrity you bring to your ear-training study, the greater the impact it can have on your growth as an artist. So go for it—whether you find yourself in ear-training class, in the practice room, or on stage, make music happen. It’s yours to own and share.

3.8 Dictation Materials I. Identification of Minor Scale Degrees

Your teacher will establish a key and then play its scale degrees in random order or as a specific pitch in a melody (by number—first, second, last, or by position—high or low). Identify each by writing its number in the appropriate space. Place an up arrow in front of scale degree 6 or 7 if you hear either of them in their raised position.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 205

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

205

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ II. Identification of Major Scale Degrees

Your teacher will establish a key and then play its scale degrees in random order or as a specific pitch in a melody (by number—first, second, last, or by position—high or low). Identify each by writing its number in the appropriate space. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ III. Interval Identification

Your teacher will play several intervals. Identify their quality and size as one of the following: M2 = Major second m2 = Minor second

P4 = Perfect fourth TT = Tritone

m6 = Minor sixth m7 = Minor seventh

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 206

206

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

M3 = Major third m3 = Minor third

P5 = Perfect fifth M6 = Major sixth

X = Other

Be sure to make a clear difference between your capital and lower-case Ms. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ IV. Triad Quality Identification

Your teacher will play several triads. Indicate the quality and inversion. Possible answers are M for major, m for minor, and d for diminished. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 207

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

207

V. Dominant Seventh Chord Identification

Your teacher will play several dominant seventh chords. Indicate the inversion for each by using the correct figured bass symbol. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ VI. Melodic and Rhythmic Dictation

Your teacher will play a short melody or rhythm. Notate it on the staves below. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 208

208

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VII. Harmonic Dictation

Write the soprano line, bass line, and provide a Roman numeral analysis (including inversional symbols) for the progression you hear on the grand staff below. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 209

Changing Meter; Second Division in Compound Meter; The Dominant Sound

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

209

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 210

Chapter 4

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

4.1 Irregular Divisions I: Triplets and Duplets Facts You Need to Know A triplet is a group of three even notes performed in the same time as two notes of the same value. Triplets are indicated with the number “3” and often have a slur or bracket above or below the notes. The chart below shows the most common triplets in simple meter. Note that these one-beat triplets are always written using the same note value as the division of the beat. EXAMPLE 4.1.1

beat

division

triplet

beat

beat

Triplets look identical to compound meter divisions, but have a completely different function in music. They belong to a group of rhythms referred to as irregular divisions of the beat (including triplets, duplets, quintuplets, etc.). The most important use of triplets is one that emphasizes their “irregularity,” creating a sense of resistance in music. Play the two melodies below: EXAMPLE 4.1.2

Melody I

Melody II

In Melody I, the melodic contour helps to shape the phrase, the rhythm plays a lesser role. Melody II uses the same basic melodic line, but is enhanced by triplets. Notice the sense of drive the triplets provide. In a case like this, performers will often give each note of the triplet the same amount of weight, which adds intensity and resistance.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 211

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

211

Another common use of triplets is to employ them as a textural device, as shown in the example below. EXAMPLE 4.1.3

Here, the triplets act as an accompaniment figure below the melodic line, so the triplets begin to sound more like compound meter divisions—the sense of resistance is replaced by the undulating effect of the repeated three-note groupings. You hear this often in music; one of the most famous examples is Beethoven’s “Moonlight” Sonata. However, if a composer writes divisions in another voice over the undulating triplets, the sense of resistance returns because of the struggle of the two against three—each group of divisions fights to dominate the line, as evidenced in the example below. EXAMPLE 4.1.4

Two against Three

As you heard in the example above, placing triplets against the normal division creates rhythmic conflict and interest. The snarl of two against three creates tension and ambiguity in music. Many methods for learning to perform 2:3 exist. In order to achieve the best musical result, avoid relying on common “tricks” such as the saying “not diff-i-cult.” Instead, use the following procedure: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Set the metronome to a moderate tempo; clap the beat and articulate the divisions. Continue with the metronome, this time articulating triplets. Repeat, switching between the two groupings. Be sure the triplets are even! At the same tempo, clap eighth notes and articulate one group of triplets followed by a beat. Repeat this until you feel comfortable. 5. Clap divisions and articulate triplets, this time repeating the triplets continuously. You may also tap divisions with one hand, triplets with the other. 6. Once you master this, repeat the process clapping triplets and articulating divisions when you get to #4.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 212

212

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

Rhythm Reading

When performing triplets, listen carefully to ensure that the notes are even; it is easy to turn the triplet into another more common rhythm you’ve already studied, such as short-short long or the reverse. Performing triplets requires careful listening and adjustments. The preparatory exercises in this chapter will help you to develop this skill. Duplets

A duplet is a group of two equal notes performed in the same time as three notes of the same value. Duplets are indicated with the number “2” and often have a slur or bracket above or below the notes. The chart below shows the most common duplets in compound meter. Note that they are written using the same note value as the division of the beat. EXAMPLE 4.1.5

Beat

Division

Duplet

Beat

Beat

Like their triplet counterparts, duplets are an irregular division of the beat that create a sense of resistance in music by seeming to slow down the momentum of the rhythm, as shown in the two melodic fragments below: EXAMPLE 4.1.6

Fragment 1

Fragment 2

Preliminary Exercises Practice each exercise below with a metronome, clap the beat while articulating the rhythm (or clapping the rhythm); repeat until you are able to perform the rhythm with 100 percent accuracy. For an extra challenge, clap divisions while you articulate the rhythm.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 213

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

Triplets EXAMPLE 4.1.7

1.

2.

4.

3.

Duplets EXAMPLE 4.1.8

1.

2.

3.

4.

Rhythms RHYTHM 4.1.1

Moderato

213

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 214

214

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

RHYTHM 4.1.2

Andante con moto

RHYTHM 4.1.3

Presto

RHYTHM 4.1.4

Animato

RHYTHM 4.1.5

Schnell

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 215

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

RHYTHM 4.1.6

Allegro

RHYTHM 4.1.7

Amabile

RHYTHM 4.1.8

Adagio

calando

RHYTHM 4.1.9

Allegretto

215

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 216

216

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

RHYTHM 4.1.10

Lento

cantabile

RHYTHM 4.1.11

Lebhaft

RHYTHM 4.1.12

Andante

calando

RHYTHM 4.1.13

Grazioso

allargando

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 217

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

RHYTHM 4.1.14

Modèrè

RHYTHM 4.1.15

Andante

legato

RHYTHM 4.1.16

Joyfully

RHYTHM 4.1.17

Moderato

217

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 218

218

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

RHYTHM 4.1.18

Comodo

rit.

RHYTHM 4.1.19

Più mosso

RHYTHM 4.1.20

Adagio

Two-part Rhythms TWO-PART RHYTHM 4.1.1

Allegro moderato

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 219

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

TWO-PART RHYTHM 4.1.2

Langsam

TWO-PART RHYTHM 4.1.3

Gedehnt

Bring out bass voice

TWO-PART RHYTHM 4.1.4

Andante

TWO-PART RHYTHM 4.1.5

Allegretto

219

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 220

220

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

Three-part Rhythm THREE-PART RHYTHM 4.1

Andantino

rit.

rit. rit.

4.2 Major Sevenths Facts You Need to Know Major sevenths are wide dissonances. Major sevenths occur in two places in the major scale: 1. Between scale degrees 1 and 7 2. Between scale degrees 4 and 3 Major sevenths occur in four places in the minor scale: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Between scale degrees 1 and #7 Between scale degrees 3 and 2 Between scale degrees b6 and 5 Between scale degrees b7 and #6, although this combination of scale degrees is extremely rare

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 221

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

221

Hearing 1. Listen for a wide and biting dissonant sound. 2. Listen for the upper pitch having a strong desire to resolve up by minor second to tonic (creating a perfect octave). 3. Listen for the lower pitch having the stable and non-moving sound of tonic.

Singing 1. Use scale degrees 1 up to 7 in the major mode as your point of reference. 2. If singing a descending interval, sing the pattern for scale degree 7 in both the higher and the lower octave to find tonic, or find the higher tonic and arpeggiate through the tonic triad to find the lower tonic. 3. If necessary, orient yourself around this tonic by singing all of the scale degree patterns. 4. Sing scale degrees 1 and 7 in the correct order, followed by the interval quality and size. EXAMPLE 4.2.1

D

Do Ti 1 7 Ma - jor Sev - enth

D

Ti Do Ma - jor Sev - enth 7 1

If you are singing a harmonic major seventh, don’t back off from the dissonant sound. Enjoy it, and back off when the interval finally resolves.

Assignments for Practice Listen for and identify major sevenths in music that you hear, sing, or practice.

Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 4.2.1

PITCH PATTERN 4.2.2

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 222

222

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

Melodies As you sing the following melodies, pay particular attention to the integrity of each pitch’s scale degree. Notice also how each seventh you sing creates the expectation that the melody will need to fill in that musical space. How is that done? MELODY 4.2.1

Piu allegro

MELODY 4.2.2

Andante

cresc.

MELODY 4.2.3

Moderato

Does the following melody feel or sound different if you perform it in a simple duple meter ( 24 )? MELODY 4.2.4

Slowly, contemplatively

Provide your own tempo, style, and dynamic markings for the following two melodies.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 223

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

MELODY 4.2.5

Abruptly

detached

MELODY 4.2.6

Quick waltz tempo

MELODY 4.2.7

With irony

MELODY 4.2.8

Andantino

cantabile

rit.

223

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 224

224

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

MELODY 4.2.9

Grave

MELODY 4.2.10

With intensity

separated

MELODY 4.2.11

With spirit, not too fast

MELODY 4.2.12

Rasch

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 225

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

MELODY 4.2.13

Moderato

MELODY 4.2.14

Misterioso

MELODY 4.2.15

Gently

225

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 226

226

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

Duets DUET 4.2.1

DUET 4.2.2

Allegretto

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 227

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

DUET 4.2.3

Con moto

dim.

dim.

cresc.

Chorale CHORALE 4.2

Solemnly

227

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 228

228

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 4.2

Sweetly

Sweetly

rit.

rit

4.3 Compound Intervals Facts You Need to Know Compound intervals are intervals that are wider than an octave. You can take any simple interval and move the pitches apart by an octave to create a compound interval: Seconds become ninths Thirds become tenths Fourths become elevenths Fifths become twelfths Sixths become thirteenths Sevenths become fourteenths Compound intervals share the same scale degree content and other characteristics as their simple cousins.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 229

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

229

Hearing As with all intervals, pay attention to what scale degrees make up the interval. Compound intervals will have a wider distance than one would expect from the scale degrees. For example, a major ninth (a compound major second) is typically heard as scale degree 1 to 2, but the distance of the ninth is far greater than one would expect between these scale degrees. To make sure you are hearing the interval correctly, try singing the lower pitch up an octave and making sure it is still below the upper pitch.

Singing 1. As with all intervals, begin by knowing which scale degrees you are going to sing. Next, find tonic and orient yourself in this key. You may want to do part of the setup from both the lower and the upper tonic. 2. Find and sing the simple interval counterpart to the compound interval you are asked to sing. For example, if asked to sing an ascending major tenth, begin by singing an ascending major third: EXAMPLE 4.3.1

C

Do 1

Mi 3

Ma - jor Third

3. Displace the appropriate pitch by an octave to create the compound interval: EXAMPLE 4.3.2

C

Do 1

Mi 3

Ma - jor Tenth

Exercises Before singing the melodies below, find the wide leaps that form the compound intervals. Practice these in isolation before trying the entire melody. Because very few people have a vocal range that can accommodate very wide intervals, the following melodies generally limit leaps to a major tenth.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 230

230

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

MELODY 4.3.1

Andante

MELODY 4.3.2

Con forza

MELODY 4.3.3

Breit

MELODY 4.3.4

Happily

poco rit.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 231

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

MELODY 4.3.5

Misterioso

MELODY 4.3.6

MELODY 4.3.7

MELODY 4.3.8

Moderato

231

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 232

232

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

MELODY 4.3.9

Vif

subito

MELODY 4.3.10

Lourd

MELODY 4.3.11

Andantino

MELODY 4.3.12

Playfully

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 233

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

MELODY 4.3.13

Allegro

MELODY 4.3.14

Allegretto

MELODY 4.3.15

Lebhaft

rit.

233

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 234

234

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

MELODY 4.3.16

Mischievously

detached

Duets DUET 4.3.1

Andante cantabile

DUET 4.3.2

Adagio

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 235

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

235

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 4.3

Vif

Vif

léger

4.4 Major-Major and Minor-Minor Seventh Chords Major-Major Seventh Chords

Facts You Need to Know Major-major seventh chords are sometimes called “major seventh chords” by musicians. They consist of a major triad with a major third placed above it, forming a major seventh above the root. Major-major seventh chords appear in the major mode as: IM7, consisting of scale degrees 1, 3, 5, and 7 IVM7, consisting of scale degrees 4, 6, 1, and 3 Major-major seventh chords appear in the minor mode as: IIIM7, consisting of scale degrees 3, 5, 7, and 1 VIM7, consisting of scale degrees 6, 1, 3, and 5 As with all chords, adding a seventh does not change its function. As with all seventh chords, the chord seventh is a tendency tone that must resolve down by step.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 236

236

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

Hearing When identifying root position MM7 chords, listen for these things: 1. Both scale degrees 7 (the leading tone) and 1 (tonic), in the texture. 2. A lack of desire to resolve—the chord as a whole is fairly stable. Scale degree 7, however, has both the leading tone’s natural tendency to resolve up to tonic as well as a chord seventh’s natural tendency to resolve down by step. This tension is one of the elements that makes this chord so beautiful and fun to sing. 3. A minor second (or minor ninth) will be in the texture if the chord is inverted—this is the only tonal seventh chord that contains a minor second. 4. To determine inversion, listen for the scale degree of the lowest pitch. If it is in root position, it will be scale degree 1; first inversion will be scale degree 3, second inversion will be scale degree 5, and third inversion will be scale degree 7.

Singing MM7 Chords 1. Use the MM7 chord that appears as tonic in the major mode as your point of reference. 2. Know which scale degree your given pitch represents (1 if root position, 3 if first inversion, 5 if second inversion, and 7 if third inversion). 3. If necessary, sing the scale degree pattern for the given pitch to find tonic, and orient yourself in this key by singing all of the scale degree patterns in the major mode. You may want to focus on the patterns for scale degrees 1, 3, 5, and 7, as these will be the ones you use to sing the chord. 4. Sing scale degrees 1, 3, 5, and 7 in the order indicated by the inversion. Pay particular attention to the integrity of scale degree 7. Students often sing it too low, changing the chord into a much more “comfortable” dominant seventh chord. EXAMPLE 4.4.1

First Inversion

Root Position

B

Do 1

Mi Sol 3 5

Ti 7

G

Sol 5

Ti 7

Do 1

Mi 3

Ti 7

Do 1

Third Inversion

Second Inversion

E

Mi Sol 3 5

C

Ti 7

Do 1

Mi Sol 3 5

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 237

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

237

Minor-Minor Seventh Chords

Facts You Need to Know Minor-minor seventh chords are often called “minor seventh” chords by musicians. They occur in three places in the major mode: 1. As ii7, consisting of scale degrees 2, 4, 6, and 1 2. As iii7, consisting of scale degrees 3, 5, 7, and 2 3. As vi7, consisting of scale degrees 6, 1, 3, and 5 They occur in two places in the minor mode: 1. As i7, consisting of scale degrees 1, 3, 5, and 7 2. As iv7, consisting of scale degrees 4, 6, 1, and 3

Hearing Minor-minor seventh chords typically sound like predominant chords. Listen for the fifth and seventh wanting to resolve down by step to a dominant seventh chord and then to tonic in the major mode. This three-chord progression is characteristic of the mm7 chord. EXAMPLE 4.4.2

D

ii 7

V 43

I

Singing 1. Use the supertonic seventh chord (ii7) in the major mode as your point of reference. 2. Determine the scale degree of the given pitch based on the requested inversion. 3. If necessary, sing that scale degree’s pattern to find tonic, and orient yourself in that key. Focus on scale degrees 2, 4, 6, and 1. 4. Sing scale degrees 2, 4, 6, and 1 in the correct order.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 238

238

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

EXAMPLE 4.4.3

First Inversion

Root Position

B

Re 2

Fa 4

La 6

Do 1

G

La 6

Do 1

Re 2

La 6

Do 1

Re 2

Third Inversion

Second Inversion

E

Fa 4

Fa 4

C

Do 1

Re 2

Fa 4

La 6

5. Pay attention to how these chords want to resolve through a dominant to tonic. Memorize the following progressions: EXAMPLE 4.4.4

F ii 7

V 43

I

F ii 65

V 42

I6

F ii 43

V7

I

F ii 42

V 65

I

Assignments for Practice 1. Practice singing MM7 and mm7 chords in all inversions and orderings from the same starting pitch. 2. Sing a MM7 followed rapidly by a Mm7, then a mm7 starting on the same pitch. Notice the similarities and differences between the sounds. Notice how each has a different desire to resolve. How many pitches need to move to change a MM7 into a Mm7 How many to change a Mm7 into a mm7?

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 239

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 4.4.1

PITCH PATTERN 4.4.2

Melodies MELODY 4.4.1

Amabile

MELODY 4.4.2

Grazioso

MELODY 4.4.3

Nicht zu schnell

239

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 240

240

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

MELODY 4.4.4

Giocoso

MELODY 4.4.5

Grave

espressivo

MELODY 4.4.6

Smoothly, with elegance

MELODY 4.4.7

Moderato

with determination

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 241

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

MELODY 4.4.8

Vivace

MELODY 4.4.9

Andante cantabile

MELODY 4.4.10

Thoughtfully

rit. MELODY 4.4.11

Schnell

sempre leggiero

241

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 242

242

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

MELODY 4.4.12

Lebhaft

MELODY 4.4.13

Andantino

MELODY 4.4.14

With humor

cresc. MELODY 4.4.15

Moderato

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 243

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

Duets DUET 4.4.1

Andante moderato

rit.

DUET 4.4.2

Moderato

243

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 244

244

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

DUET 4.4.3

Andante

Chorale CHORALE 4.4

Andante

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 245

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

245

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 4.4

Andante con moto

Andante con moto

4.5 Diminished Seventh Chords Half-Diminished (Diminished-Minor) Seventh Chords

Facts You Need to Know Half-diminished seventh chords consist of a diminished triad with a major third placed above it, forming a minor seventh above the root. They appear in the major mode in only one place: As viiø7, consisting of scale degrees 7, 2, 4, and 6 They appear in the minor mode in only one place: As iiø7, consisting of scale degrees 2, 4, 6, and 1 As with all chords, adding a seventh does not change its function. As with all seventh chords, the chord seventh is a tendency tone that must resolve down by step.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 246

246

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

Hearing When identifying root position dm7 chords, listen for these things: 1. Both scale degrees 7 (the leading tone) and 6 (the submediant), in the texture. 2. A strong dominant sound and desire to resolve to a major tonic. 3. To determine inversion, listen for the scale degree of the lowest pitch. If it is in root position, it will be scale degree 7; first inversion will be scale degree 2, second inversion will be scale degree 4, and third inversion will be scale degree 6.

Singing dm7 Chords 1. Use the dm7 chord that appears as the leading tone seventh chord in the major mode as your point of reference. 2. Know which scale degree your given pitch represents (7 if root position, 2 if first inversion, 4 if second inversion, and 6 if third inversion). 3. If necessary, sing the scale degree pattern for the given pitch to find tonic, and orient yourself in this key by singing all of the scale degree patterns in the major mode. You may want to focus on the patterns for scale degrees 7, 2, 4, and 6, as these will be the ones you use to sing the chord. 4. Sing scale degrees 7, 2, 4, and 6 in the order indicated by the inversion. EXAMPLE 4.5.1

First Inversion

Root Position

G

Ti 7

Re 2

Fa 4

La 6

E

Fa 4

La 6

Ti 7

Re 2

Fa 4

La 6

Ti 7

Third Inversion

Second Inversion

C

Re 2

A

La 6

Ti 7

Re 2

Fa 4

Fully Diminished (Diminished-Diminished) Seventh Chords

Facts You Need to Know Fully diminished seventh chords occur diatonically in only one place in the entire tonal system: as the leading tone seventh chord (vii°7) in the minor mode.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 247

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

247

Hearing Fully diminished seventh chords have a strong dominant sound that wants to resolve to the tonic triad in the minor mode. Listen specifically for the presence of scale degrees #7 and b6. Fully diminished seventh chords are symmetrical—all of the intervals are the same (the second is an augmented second which is enharmonically the same as a minor third). As a result, it is not possible to determine the inversion when taken out of context.

Singing 1. Use the leading tone seventh chord (vii°7) in the minor mode as your point of reference. 2. Hear the given pitch as the leading tone (#7). 3. If necessary, sing that scale degree’s pattern to find tonic, and orient yourself in that key. Focus on scale degrees #7, 2, 4, and 6. 4. Sing scale degrees #7, 2, 4, and 6 in the correct order. EXAMPLE 4.5.2

First Inversion

Root Position

Ti 7

e

Re 2

Fa 4

Le 6

c

Fa 4

Le 6

Ti 7

Fa 4

Le 6

Ti 7

Third Inversion

Second Inversion

b

Re 2

Re 2

g

Le 6

Ti 7

Re 2

Fa 4

Assignments for Practice 1. Practice singing half and fully diminished seventh chords in all inversions and orderings from the same starting pitch. 2. Sing a half-diminished seventh chord and treat it as a supertonic seventh chord in the minor mode. Sing through a dominant seventh to tonic, as illustrated below. See what happens if you invert the first chord. EXAMPLE 4.5.3

c

iiø7

V43

i

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 248

248

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

3. Sing a MM7 followed rapidly by a Mm7, a mm7, a dm7, and a dd7 starting on the same pitch. Notice the similarities and differences between the sounds. Notice how each has a different desire to resolve. How many pitches need to move to change from one chord to the next?

Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 4.5.1

PITCH PATTERN 4.5.2

Melodies MELODY 4.5.1

Moderato

dolce

rit.

MELODY 4.5.2

Slowly

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 249

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

MELODY 4.5.3

Placidly

MELODY 4.5.4

Andante grazioso

MELODY 4.5.5

Comodo

MELODY 4.5.6

Andante

MELODY 4.5.7

Allegro marcato

249

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 250

250

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

MELODY 4.5.8

Allegro con brio

MELODY 4.5.9

Behaglich

allargando

MELODY 4.5.10

Lento

MELODY 4.5.11

Sadly

cresc.

dim.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 251

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

MELODY 4.5.12

Vite

tres leger et legato

MELODY 4.5.13

Andantino

MELODY 4.5.14

Belebt

MELODY 4.5.15

Grazioso

251

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 252

252

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

Duets DUET 4.5.1

Allegro ma non troppo

DUET 4.5.2

Allegro

molto rit.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 253

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

DUET 4.5.3

Andante

Chorale CHORALE 4.5

Sternly

253

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 254

254

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 4.5

Presto

Presto

4.6 Improvisation III: Predominant Function Facts You Need to Know Predominant function chords serve two musical roles: 1. To prepare and lead to the dominant. 2. To smoothly lead away from the tonic. Predominant function chords are the same in the major and minor modes: 1. Subdominant chords (IV in major, iv in minor) 2. Supertonic chords (ii in major, ii° in minor) 3. Submediant chords (vi in major, VI in minor) Inverting chords does not change their function, nor does adding sevenths. Predominant function chords all share scale degree 6 (lowered form in minor). The scale degrees to focus on when improvising predominant function are 2, 4, 6, and 1. Scale degree 3 may also be used to a lesser extent.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 255

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

255

Hearing Predominant chords often create the sensation of expansion and motion away from the tonic chord. They also lead to the very strong pull of the dominant chord. As such, they possess neither the stability of tonic function nor the desire toward resolution of dominant function. Listen for a lack of stability in the sound but not the direct pull toward tonic. To determine the specific predominant chord being used, listen for chord quality and inversion.

Singing When improvising predominant function, focus on singing scale degrees 2, 4, 6, and 1. Use the same three techniques for improvisation that you used for tonic function: 1. Repetition EXAMPLE 4.6.1

Moderato

Predominant Function

2. Arpeggiation EXAMPLE 4.6.2

Moderato

Predominant Function

3. Connected arpeggiation EXAMPLE 4.6.3

Moderato

Predominant Function

Be aware of the amount of time that you have to fill. Keep counting! As always, use rhythmic and melodic components from elsewhere in the melody to help make your improvisation fit into the sound of the melody.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 256

256

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

Assignments for Practice Melodies Improvise predominant harmony in the blank measures of the melodies. MELODY 4.6.1

Piu allegro

Predominant Function

Predominant Function

MELODY 4.6.2

Andante

Predominant Function

Predominant Function

MELODY 4.6.3

Slowly

Predominant Function

Predominant Function

Dominant Function

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 257

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

MELODY 4.6.4 Predominant Function

Agitato

separated

MELODY 4.6.5

Allegretto Tonic Function

Tonic Function

Predominant Function

Dominant Function

Dominant Function

Predominant Function

MELODY 4.6.6 Tonic Function

Predominant Function

MELODY 4.6.7 Tonic Function

Tonic Function

Tonic Function

257

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 258

258

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

MELODY 4.6.8

Dominant Function

MELODY 4.6.9 Predominant Function

MELODY 4.6.10 Tonic Function

Tonic Function

MELODY 4.6.11 Predominant Harmony

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 259

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

MELODY 4.6.12 Dominant Function

Dominant Function

MELODY 4.6.13 Predominant Function

Tonic Function

Dominant Function

MELODY 4.6.14 Tonic Function

Dominant Function

Predominant Function

Tonic Function

MELODY 4.6.15 Tonic Function

Dominant Function

Predominant Function

Tonic Function

259

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 260

260

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

Duets DUET 4.6.1

Slowly

dolce

dolce

Predominant Function

Predominant Function

DUET 4.6.2

Moderato

Tonic Function

Tonic Function

Predominant Func.

Dominant Function

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 261

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

261

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 4.6

Allegro vivace

Allegro vivace

r.h. legato

4.7 Music from the Literature EXAMPLE 4.7.1

Violin I

Chorale, from Cantata 140 J.S. Bach

EXAMPLE 4.7.2 Minuet

Domenico Scarlatti

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 262

262

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

EXAMPLE 4.7.3 “Moravian Dance,” from Suite, Op. 3

6 6 Leos Janácek

Con moto

EXAMPLE 4.7.4 To Spring, Op. 43, No. 6

Allegro appassionato

Edvard Grieg

cantabile e molto tenuta la melodia

EXAMPLE 4.7.5 “La fille aux cheveux de lin,” from Préludes pour Piano, Book I Claude Debussy

sans rigueur

dim.

EXAMPLE 4.7.6 Russian Folk Dance

Beethoven

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 263

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

263

EXAMPLE 4.7.7 “Gute-nacht,” from Winterreise

Moderato

Franz Schubert

EXAMPLE 4.7.8 Se tu m'ami, se sospiri

Andantino

Giovanni Pergolesi

cresc.

EXAMPLE 4.7.9 To a Wild Rose, Op. 51, No. 1

With simple tenderness

Edward MacDowell

EXAMPLE 4.7.10 Sonatina No. 34 in D Major

Presto

Georg Anton Benda

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 264

264

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

EXAMPLE 4.7.11 Nocturne in D Minor, Hopk. No. 59A: 13

Lento

John Field

plaintivo

Reflections: Listening Listening is the very foundation of our work as musicians. Though we tend to think of listening as something automatic (it’s what we do, after all!) it is not; listening is a skill we need to cultivate throughout our careers. Musicians use listening in a number of ways: as a means to becoming familiar with repertoire, to refine our aural sensitivity, and to be our own best critic. Being an effective listener is our pathway to learning and artistry. Developing critical listening skills helps us to practice more efficiently; be a better ensemble member and more knowledgeable audience member; become more sensitive to harmonic color; play or sing with better intonation; and become highly sensitive to what we hear. At its most fundamental, listening is a primary ingredient of communication, and communication is at the heart of our work. The artistic refinement we develop through well-honed listening skills allows us to achieve better communication with other musicians and our audience alike. So what is listening, exactly? Listening is an active experience that requires focus and concentration. It is a multi-step process that involves first hearing something, then categorizing and incorporating it into a schema you understand, then interpreting it, personalizing it to use in your own way. Listening requires an open mind, so that we don’t just hear what we want to hear, but instead are able to tune into what is really happening. For example, in a chamber group, listening well means recognizing that you are the person playing out of tune rather than assuming that those around you are wrong; it also means being open to what you hear. Your playing partner may decide to use rubato in a new way or deliberately toy with a tempo; listening with an open mind allows you to respond immediately to what you hear. Listening is an experience that happens in time; once the moment is gone, we can’t get it back—that’s why focus and concentration is so important. The challenge is to develop the ability to hear, categorize, and interpret in rapid-fire fashion. Perhaps you experience the need for this rapid reaction when you take melodic dictation, for example. You hear a melody, and start to write, but if the melody continues, you need to still be listening while you write. Focus is essential! Memory is also in important part of developing listening skills. In order to use and incorporate what you hear, you need the ability to retain it over the short and long term. Learning to recognize intervals is a matter of memory, for example. You listen to an interval and categorize its sound by reacting to the color and timbre of what you hear. That, in turn, helps you to memorize the individual characteristics of the interval. In this way, listening is turned into knowledge. Developing your inner hearing—the ability to hear inside your head—is another essential part of listening. Inner hearing plays an important role in intonation. To play in tune, you need to hear a pitch before you play or sing it, then refine its center once you create sound and hear how what you’re playing relates to the sound around you. Inner hearing helps fuel our musical imaginations and creativity. It helps us to imagine how we want a piece to sound as we work on our interpretation of it, helps us to see music we hear and to hear music

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 265

we see. Perhaps there is no better example in all of music than the genius of Beethoven, who wrote some of his most deeply creative music after experiencing total hearing loss. His inner hearing was astounding. Developing your listening skill happens through practicing a mindful approach. Take advantage of the opportunities you have every day, in classes, ensembles, and the practice room, to groom your skill.

4.8 Dictation Materials I. Identification of Minor Scale Degrees

Your teacher will establish a key and then play its scale degrees in random order or as a specific pitch in a melody (by number—first, second, last, or by position—high or low). Identify each by writing its number in the appropriate space. Place an up arrow in front of scale degree 6 or 7 if you hear either of them in their raised position. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ II. Identification of Major Scale Degrees

Your teacher will establish a key and then play its scale degrees in random order or as a specific pitch in a melody (by number—first, second, last, or by position—high or low). Identify each by writing its number in the appropriate space. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 266

266

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ III. Interval Identification

Your teacher will play several intervals. Identify their quality and size as one of the following: M2 = Major second m2 = Minor second M3 = Major third m3 = Minor third P4 = Perfect fourth

TT = Tritone P5 = Perfect fifth M6 = Major sixth m6 = Minor sixth M7 = Major seventh

m7 = Minor seventh P8 = Perfect octave M9 = Major ninth m9 = Minor ninth M10 = Major tenth m10 = Minor tenth

Be sure to make a clear difference between your capital and lower-case Ms. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ IV. Triad Quality Identification

Your teacher will play several triads. Indicate the quality and inversion. Possible answers are M for major, m for minor, and d for diminished.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 267

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

267

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ V. Seventh Chord Identification

Your teacher will play several seventh chords. Indicate the quality (MM, Mm, mm, dm, or dd) and inversion for each by using the correct figured bass symbol. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 268

268

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

VI. Melodic and Rhythmic Dictation

Your teacher will play a short melody or rhythm. Notate it on the staves below. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 269

Triplets and Duplets; Seventh Chords and Predominant Function

269

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VII. Harmonic Dictation

Write the soprano line, bass line, and provide a Roman numeral analysis (including inversional symbols) for the progression you hear on the grand staff below. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 270

Chapter 5

Less Common Meters; C Clefs and Harmonic Progression

5.1 Less Common Simple and Compound Meters Facts You Need to Know In this text, “Less Common Meters” are defined as simple meters that use a half note or eighth note as the beat-note value (except 22), and compound meters that use the dotted-eighth or dotted-half note as the beat-note.

Reading in Less Common Simple Meters

Reading music written in these meters may seem difficult because it looks so different from what you are most accustomed to seeing. You can minimize this perceived difficulty if you keep these basic principles in mind: 1. In simple meters, regardless of the beat-note value, each beat divides naturally into two parts, and each division further divides into two. 2. Regardless of the beat-note value, the 2:1 relationship between notes always remains the same: a half note has two quarter notes, a quarter has two eighths, etc. Refer to the charts in Sections 1.1 and 1.2 for a visual representation of these note-value equivalents and how they relate to specific meters. To read in less common meters: 1. Look at the time signature; determine the beat-note value and number of beats in a measure. 2. Once you know the beat-note value, remind yourself what the division and multiple of the beat will be. 3. Use the same counting system in these meters as you do in more frequently encountered meter. For example, if you typically count with “+’s” in 24 , do the same in 28 (as in example A opposite).

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 271

Less Common Meters; C Clefs and Harmonic Progression

271

EXAMPLE 5.1.1

Example A:

1 + 2

Same rhythm, different meter: use the same counting system.

+

1 e + a 2 +

1+ 2 +

1 e + a 2 +

Many students try to relate a less common meter to one with a quarter note as the beat-note value (as in example B below). Avoid this technique—it makes rhythm reading more complicated and cumbersome! Doing so also eliminates one of the most important elements in performance: the integrity of the written meter. EXAMPLE 5.1.2

Example B: Use a traditional counting system, like this:

1+ 2 + 3+ 4+

1 + 2 + 3

4

rather than trying to imagine how the meter relates to 4/4, as in this example:

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 etc.

Use the same process to read in less common compound meters (such as 166 and 64 ): Determine the value of the beat-note and divisions and remember that in compound meter, the beat is always divided into three parts. Refer to the charts in Chapter 2, Section 2.1, Compound Meters, to see examples of these infrequently used compound meters. As in simple meter, use the same counting method for these meters as you do in 68—it is the easiest and most direct way to ensure accuracy. Rhythms RHYTHM 5.1.1

Adagio

RHYTHM 5.1.2

Adagio

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 272

272

Less Common Meters; C Clefs and Harmonic Progression

RHYTHM 5.1.3

Largo

RHYTHM 5.1.4

Presto

RHYTHM 5.1.5

Broadly

RHYTHM 5.1.6

Adagio

rall.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 273

Less Common Meters; C Clefs and Harmonic Progression

RHYTHM 5.1.7

Andante

RHYTHM 5.1.8

Allegretto

RHYTHM 5.1.9

Largo

RHYTHM 5.1.10

Adagio

morendo

273

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 274

274

Less Common Meters; C Clefs and Harmonic Progression

RHYTHM 5.1.11

Langsam

RHYTHM 5.1.12

Allegretto

RHYTHM 5.1.13

Presto

RHYTHM 5.1.14 Choose your own tempo

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 275

Less Common Meters; C Clefs and Harmonic Progression

275

RHYTHM 5.1.15

Largo

5.2 Reading the Alto and Tenor Clefs Facts You Need to Know The location of pitches on the staff is determined by the placement of a clef at the beginning of each line of music. This clef shows the location of one pitch, from which we can figure out where all of the remaining pitches are. We have already worked with the G clef, which is used for the treble clef, and the F clef, which is used for the bass clef. The remaining clef is the C clef, which shows the location of the pitch C4 (or middle C). When the C clef is placed on the third or middle line, the music is in alto clef. When it is placed on the fourth line, it is in tenor clef. The placement of notes on the alto and tenor staves appears below: EXAMPLE 5.2.1 Alto Clef

B2

C3

D3

E3

F3

G3

A3

B3

C4

D4

E4

F4

B2

C3

D3

E3

F3

G3

A3

B3

C4

D4

G4

A4

B4

C5

D5

Tenor Clef

G2

A2

E4

F4

G4

A4

B4

Alto clef is the primary clef used by violists, so anybody who might read a string score some day needs to become proficient with it. It is also used for trombones and some older vocal parts. Tenor clef is used frequently by cellos, bassoons, and trombones, and again it appears in some older vocal parts.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 276

276

Less Common Meters; C Clefs and Harmonic Progression

Reading in the Alto and Tenor Clefs Just as with the treble and bass clefs, begin to develop reading fluency by selecting two or three lines to use as “reference points” on the staff: first line F, third line C and fifth line G are good choices for the alto staff, and the second line F and fourth line C are good choices for the tenor staff. Scan the notes in each exercise before you begin, looking for large leaps, relating them to your established points of reference. EXAMPLE 5.2.2

G4

C4 C4

F3

F3

Once again, the only way to effectively master this skill is to do it. Devote some time each day to reading clefs until you are fluent with all of them.

Assignments for Practice Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 5.2.1 Choose Clef

PITCH PATTERN 5.2.2 Choose Clef

PITCH PATTERN 5.2.3 Choose Clef

PITCH PATTERN 5.2.4 Choose Clef

PITCH PATTERN 5.2.5 Choose Clef

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 277

Less Common Meters; C Clefs and Harmonic Progression

Melodies MELODY 5.2.1

Cantabile

MELODY 5.2.2

Adagio

MELODY 5.2.3

Langsam

MELODY 5.2.4

Vivace

277

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 278

278

Less Common Meters; C Clefs and Harmonic Progression

MELODY 5.2.5

Slowly

MELODY 5.2.6

Lively

MELODY 5.2.7

Waltz tempo

MELODY 5.2.8

With intensity

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 279

Less Common Meters; C Clefs and Harmonic Progression

MELODY 5.2.9

Delicately

separated

MELODY 5.2.10

With conviction

MELODY 5.2.11

Mässig

MELODY 5.2.12

Allegro assai

279

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 280

280

Less Common Meters; C Clefs and Harmonic Progression

MELODY 5.2.13

Moderato

dolce

ritardando

MELODY 5.2.14

Andante con moto

calando

MELODY 5.2.15

Lente

MELODY 5.2.16

Adagietto

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 281

Less Common Meters; C Clefs and Harmonic Progression

MELODY 5.2.17

Fast, jauntily

MELODY 5.2.18

Bewegt

MELODY 5.2.19

Calme

MELODY 5.2.20

281

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 282

282

Less Common Meters; C Clefs and Harmonic Progression

5.3 Harmonic Progressions Arpeggiating Harmonic Progressions

Facts You Need to Know Up to now, this text’s approach toward harmony has been how to express one of the three harmonic functions through improvisation. This chapter focuses on realizing harmonic progressions over which a melody may be improvised. Harmonic progressions may be realized melodically through arpeggiating chords. Listen for how the melody you sing suggests the progression of chords. In other words, sing melodically, but hear harmonically. When arpeggiating progressions, be aware of: 1. The Roman numeral of the chord you are singing and its component scale degrees. 2. The root motion (direction and distance) between chords. There are only six possibilities: Up or down by second Up or down by third Up or down by fourth All other root motions are inversions of one of the above (motion down by fifth is the same as up by fourth). The root motion governs how the voices typically move. By knowing the root motion and the location of each chord member, you can figure out each pitch’s most common motion. Here are some other factors to listen for: 1. If you are singing a tendency tone (a note with a strong desire to resolve to a particular place), do what the note tells you it wants to do. 2. If the bass is moving by step, move in the opposite direction. 3. Move the smallest possible distance to a note in the next chord—usually a second or a third. 4. If you are singing a chord seventh, step down by second. Note that these aren’t the only options. After you become comfortable using these, experiment with other possibilities.

Singing 1. Begin by figuring out the scale degrees that make up each chord. 2. Arpeggiate the first chord. 3. Use the information in the list above to figure out how the voices should move. In general, keep common tones between chords, and have moving tones make the smoothest connection between chords by moving the smallest possible distance.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 283

Less Common Meters; C Clefs and Harmonic Progression

283

4. Above all, listen for the underlying harmonic progression. This is one way that you might realize the following progression: I – IV – ii – V7 – I EXAMPLE 5.3.1

I Do 1

E

Mi 3

Sol 5

IV Do 1

Fa 4

La 6

ii Re 2

Fa 4

La 6

V7 Re 2

Fa 4

Sol 5

Ti 7

I Do 1

5.4 Frequently Used Progressions Common Progressions

Some sequential harmonic progressions appear regularly enough that it is worthwhile to simply memorize them. Sequences create musical tension by creating the expectation of eventual departure from the given pattern. As you memorize these patterns, see if you can come up with other musical ways to express the same progressions. The Circle of Fifths Progression EXAMPLE 5.4.1 Major Mode

F

I

IV

vii°

iii

vi

ii

V

I

V

i

Minor Mode

f

i

iv

VII

III

VI

ii°

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 284

284

Less Common Meters; C Clefs and Harmonic Progression

The Circle of Fifths Using Seventh Chords Progression EXAMPLE 5.4.2 Major Mode

IM7

D

vii ø7

IV M7

iii7

vi 7

ii7

V7

I

III M7

VI M7

iiø7

V7

i

Minor Mode

i7

d

VII 7

iv 7

The Descending Thirds Progression

Note that you will likely need to shift octaves at least once during this progression in order to keep it in your vocal range. Shifts below are marked with a “*”. Make the shifts where they make the most sense to your voice by stepping up from the fifth of the previous chord. EXAMPLE 5.4.3 Major Mode

I

A

* vi

Minor Mode

a

i

IV

ii

vii°

*

V

I

V

i

* VI

iv

ii°

vii°

The Filled-in Descending Thirds Progression

This progression commonly appears in two ways: with the “filling-in” chords in either root position or first inversion. Both appear below. What structure does the bass line create when these chords are in first inversion? Why does the second chord become a minor dominant in this case?

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 285

Less Common Meters; C Clefs and Harmonic Progression

285

EXAMPLE 5.4.4 Major Mode

I

B

V

vi

iii

IV

I

V

I

V

i

Minor Mode

i

b

V

VI

III

iv

i

Alternating with First Inversion Chords Major Mode

V6

I

B

iii 6

vi

I6

IV

V

I

Minor Mode

i

b

v6

III6

VI

i6

iv

V

i

The Ascending Seconds Progression EXAMPLE 5.4.5 Major Mode

C

I

ii

iii

IV

V

vi

vii°

I

Minor Mode

c

i

ii°

III

iv

V

VI

vii°

i

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 286

286

Less Common Meters; C Clefs and Harmonic Progression

The Filled-in Ascending Seconds Progression EXAMPLE 5.4.6 Major Mode

I

vi 6

ii 6

V

C

vii ø6

ii

iii 6

vi

iii

I6

IV 6

vii°

IV

I

Minor Mode

c

i

VI6

ii°

ii ø6

V

III6

VII 6

VI

III

i6

iv 6

vii°

iv

i

Once you have learned these patterns, practice starting one and then shifting to another where they share a common chord (e.g., begin with the circle of fifths and switch to descending thirds on the supertonic chord).

5.5 Improvising Melodies Over Harmonic Progressions Facts You Need to Know Melody and harmony are linked together. A melody makes sense when it conforms to a functional harmonic progression. When we sing melodically, we are also hearing harmonically.

We can identify the prevailing harmony by a Roman numeral at any moment in music based on the scale degrees that seem to be the most prominent in the measure along with the chord class that we are hearing (tonic, predominant, or dominant). We have already practiced expressing each of these chord classes individually; now it is time to practice moving between chord classes.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 287

Less Common Meters; C Clefs and Harmonic Progression

287

Singing 1. Establish a meter. In most tonal music, chords usually change every measure. This rate of change (called harmonic rhythm) sometimes speeds up as the music approaches a cadence. 2. Most melodies begin on the third or fifth of the initial tonic chord. Most melodies end on scale degree 1 on the final tonic chord. Plan a melodic shape that takes you to a climactic point about two-thirds of the way through the progression. 3. When singing, keep track of the harmonic function of the Roman numeral you are singing. Use your knowledge of which scale degrees communicate each harmonic function to emphasize the progression. Use your three improvisatory techniques (repetition, arpeggiation, and connected arpeggiation) to move through each harmonic function. 4. Look for changes in harmonic function (tonic, predominant, dominant) rather than chord changes. At the end of each functional group (chords that share the same function, like a string of predominants), consider the smoothest transition to scale degrees that communicate the next function. In most cases, you need only move by step from one harmonic function to the next. 5. Always keep track of the meter! Know where you are in each measure and change harmonies at the ends of measures. 6. As you become more comfortable improvising, take some chances. Introduce leaps to chord tones, then leaps to non-chord tones. 7. Always let your musical instincts be your guide. If a note sounds like it wants to resolve down, let it resolve down.

5.6 Progressions for Apreggiation and Improvisation Harmonic Progressions First, arpeggiate through the harmonic progressions below. You may make any chord into a seventh chord if it makes musical sense to you. Next, improvise a melody over the progressions. Establish a meter and maintain a harmonic rhythm of one chord per measure. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

I – IV – V – I I – V(7) – I I – vii° – I I – vii° – V – I I – ii – V – I I – ii – vii° – I I – IV – ii – V – I I – IV – ii – vii° – I I – vi – ii – V – I I – vi – IV – ii – vii° – V – I I – IV – I – V – I I – IV – ii – V – I

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

288

13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

Page 288

Less Common Meters; C Clefs and Harmonic Progression

I – IV – vii° – iii – vi – ii – V – I I – ii – V – I – V – I I – ii – vii° – V – I I – iii – vi – ii – V – I I – V – vi – iii – IV – I – IV – V – I I – IV – ii – V – vi – IV – ii – V – I I – vii° – I – IV – I – V – I I – vi – IV – ii – V – I

Minor Mode 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.

i–V–i i – iv – V – i i – VI – V – i i – ii° – V – i i – VI – ii° – V – I i – VI – iv – ii° – vii° – V – i i – iv – VII – III – VI – ii° – V – i i – VII – III – iv – ii° – V – i i – ii° – V – i i – iv – ii° – vii° – i i – vii° – i i – vii° – V – i i – iv – i – vii° – i i – iv – vii° – i i – iv – V – i i – iv – VII – III – VI – ii° – V – i i – VI – iv – V – i – V – i i – v – VI – III – iv – i – V – i i – iv – V – i i – III – iv – V – i – V – i

Reflections: Perseverance Most students choose to major in music because they cannot imagine doing anything else—it’s a choice born out of passion for the art and fueled by a desire to perform, create, or teach. It’s likely a mentor counseled you about what it’s like to study music—warning you that the road to becoming a musician is a difficult one, fraught with challenges that require self-determination and commitment. Undeterred, you chose to persevere; music is what you do, who you are. Now that your study of music has begun in earnest, perhaps you are beginning to understand the warning you received. The demands on your time seem to come from every direction. You’re expected to practice three to five hours a day, spend hours in rehearsal, attend classes, and complete assignments on time. You feel like you have no life. Wait—isn’t college supposed to be fun?

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 289

It is. And it really is possible to manage the demands and pressure you may be feeling. It requires perseverance. The key is to remind yourself of your long-term goals, develop the discipline to know when to work and when to play, and learn to use your time well. Long before you registered for classes, you closed your eyes and imagined yourself in front of an audience, a school choir or other group actually earning a living doing something that you love, and doing it joyfully. Let that image continue to be inspiration for you throughout your education. Though the picture may change, having a long-term goal is still an important motivator that can help you through during difficult periods. See yourself as being successful. Professionals agree that we all have the ability to create our future, but that to do so, we need to believe in our ability to grow, change, and persevere. Making a change or learning something new is a long process, and it’s normal to experience ups and downs during growth. It took Thomas Edison over one hundred attempts to create the light bulb—and rather than think he did it wrong ninetynine times, he recognized that he learned something new with every attempt. Discipline and determination are attributes that contribute to success in any field. A struggling baseball player will come to the park early to take extra batting practice; a swimmer may stay after practice to do extra laps, and professional musicians often recount their own days as students, when they woke up an hour early to do that extra bit of practicing. The determination to succeed motivates the people in each of these examples; self-discipline permits them to carry out the action that leads toward success. Learning to manage your time will help you to persevere through the challenges you face. Time management seems so blasé, so unartistic, so . . . boring. Counterintuitive though it may seem, better management of your time will actually result in more freedom and less stress. Set priorities. Create a daily schedule, with slots for practicing, studying, and rehearsing—think of it as an “action plan” to help you to stay on track. Mark upcoming performances, academic obligations, etc. on a calendar, then work backwards from those dates to set intermediary, attainable goals. Remember, studying music requires the development of skills. Skill development, by its very nature, happens best over an extended period. Cramming doesn’t work; your mind, body, and ear need time for new skills to “settle.” Small steps are essential to your success. Trust that your passion will fuel your ability to persevere through the trials of becoming an artist, and that through the personal insights gained by experiencing success, defeat, joy, and pain, you will have a wider range of emotions to call upon in all your artistic pursuits. Your ability to make art happen is the ultimate reward.

5.7 Dictation Materials I. Triad Quality Identification

Your teacher will play several triads. Indicate the quality and inversion. Possible answers are M for major, m for minor, and d for diminished. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 290

290

Less Common Meters; C Clefs and Harmonic Progression

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ II. Seventh Chord Identification

Your teacher will play several seventh chords. Indicate the quality (MM, Mm, mm, dm, or dd) and inversion for each by using the correct figured bass symbol. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ III. Melodic and Rhythmic Dictation

Your teacher will play a short melody or rhythm. Notate it on the staves below. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 291

Less Common Meters; C Clefs and Harmonic Progression

291

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IV. Harmonic Dictation

Write the soprano line, bass line, and provide a Roman numeral analysis (including inversional symbols) for the progression you hear on the grand staff below.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 292

292

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Less Common Meters; C Clefs and Harmonic Progression

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 293

Chapter 6

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

6.1 Syncopation Facts You Need to Know Syncopation occurs when a weak beat or weak part of a beat—any that is not normally emphasized— is stressed. Listeners and performers alike become accustomed to certain regularities in music—the resolution of V–I, the leading tone resolving up to tonic, and the structural power of metric stress. Syncopation disrupts our perception of the beat or meter, creating ambiguity and tension in music. It helps to give music a sense of forward motion because of our innate need for the syncopation to resolve itself. Syncopation occurs most frequently in three ways: by stressing normally weak beats or divisions; by placing rests on strong beats of a measure or on divisions of the beat (resulting in “off-beats”); and by using a tie across a barline, so that the first beat of the measure is obscured. In the example below, Mozart shifts the emphasis from beats 1 and 3 to the “and” or divisions of those beats, creating a syncopation. EXAMPLE 6.1.1 Sonata in G Major, K. 301, First movement, m. 48–51

Allegro con spirito

Mozart

In the development section of the same sonata, Mozart first uses eighth notes on the beat, then on offbeats, in the same passage. Play the example below and listen to how the energy changes in the syncopated measure (m.4).

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 294

294

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

EXAMPLE 6.1.2 Sonata in G Major, K. 301, First movement, m. 107–111

Allegro con spirito

Mozart

In this example, Beethoven makes the crusis of the measure intentionally indistinct through the use of syncopation. EXAMPLE 6.1.3 Sonata in A Minor, Op. 23, Third movement, m. 33–40

Allegro molto

Beethoven

Performing Syncopation

Syncopated rhythms are notated in two ways: either using ties to show the syncopation (measure 1, below), or using a single note (measure 2). EXAMPLE 6.1.4

One of the challenges of performing a syncopated passage is keeping the tempo steady. Western music is heavily dependent on the beat, so when it is missing or obscured, we tend to compensate by rushing. It can be helpful to practice syncopated rhythms first without ties, then repeat it with ties, hearing the tied note in your head as you articulate.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 295

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

Rhythms RHYTHM 6.1.1

With energy

RHYTHM 6.1.2

Presto

RHYTHM 6.1.3

Geschwindt

cresc.

cresc.

RHYTHM 6.1.4

Hauntingly

295

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 296

296

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

RHYTHM 6.1.5

Easy

RHYTHM 6.1.6

Vif

RHYTHM 6.1.7

Con fuoco

RHYTHM 6.1.8

Risoluto

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 297

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

RHYTHM 6.1.9

Lebhaft

leicht

subito

RHYTHM 6.1.10

Moderato

RHYTHM 6.1.11

Grazioso

RHYTHM 6.1.12

Molto allegro

297

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 298

298

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

RHYTHM 6.1.13

Presto

never loud or heavy

RHYTHM 6.1.14

Moderato

RHYTHM 6.1.15

Con moto

RHYTHM 6.1.16

Andantino

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 299

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

RHYTHM 6.1.17

Geschwindt

RHYTHM 6.1.18

Animato

RHYTHM 6.1.19

Belebt

299

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 300

300

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

Two-part Rhythms TWO-PART RHYTHM 6.1.1

Very fast and light

TWO-PART RHYTHM 6.1.2

Allegretto

Three-part Rhythm THREE-PART RHYTHM 6.1

Allegretto

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 301

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

301

6.2 The Chromatic Scale and Surface Chromaticism Facts You Need to Know The term “chromatic” is derived from the Greek word for “color.” Chromaticism “fills in” the spaces between diatonic scale degrees. It adds musical color to melodies and serves as the foundation for altered chords, tonicization, and modulation. The chromatic scale consists of twelve pitches, each roughly the same distance from the pitches around them (depending on the tuning system in use). Chromatic pitches are named based on their direction of resolution. Pitches that resolve up are named like a leading tone to the resolution pitch (e.g., a pitch resolving up to E would be a D-sharp, not an E-flat). Pitches that resolve down are named like the seventh of a dominant seventh to the resolution pitch (e.g., a pitch resolving down to F would be a G-flat, not an F-sharp). Chromatic pitches are dissonant and have a strong desire toward resolution. They sound “outside” of the key, generally drawing attention to themselves. Surface chromaticism, or chromaticism that is not a part of the underlying chord, usually takes the form of passing tones that fill in the space between diatonic notes, neighboring tones that reinforce the importance of the tone to which they resolve, and appoggiaturas which create strong desire toward resolution, usually to a tone supported by the underlying harmony.

Hearing 1. When listening for chromaticism, notice pitches that sound like they do not belong in the key and that draw attention to themselves through their desire to resolve to a more stable diatonic pitch. 2. Next, hear the direction of resolution. If it resolves up, write the chromatic pitch as a leading tone to the resolution pitch. If it resolves down, write the chromatic pitch as a minor second above the resolution pitch.

Singing To sing a chromatic scale, begin by hearing a diatonic major or minor scale: EXAMPLE 6.2.1

D

Do 1

Re 2

Mi 3

Fa 4

Sol 5

La 6

Ti 7

Do 1

Do 1

Ti 7

La 6

Sol 5

Fa 4

Mi 3

Re 2

Do 1

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 302

302

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

Wherever a major second occurs, insert a leading tone to the upper pitch. If descending, insert a dominant chord seventh to the lower pitch. EXAMPLE 6.2.2 "Open" note heads denote diatonic pitches. "Filled-in" note heads denote chromatic pitches.

D

Do 1

Di Re 1 2

D Do

Ti 7

1

Ri Mi 2 3

Te 7

La 6

Fa 4

Fi 4

Sol 5

Si 5

La 6

Le Sol 5 6

Se 5

Fa 4

Mi 3

Li 6

Me Re 2 3

Ti 7

Do 1

Ra 2

Do 1

Pay particular attention to the integrity of the underlying diatonic scale. There is a tendency to spread the minor seconds, leading to going out of the key. If you need to, stop on every diatonic pitch and check its scale degree pattern back to tonic.

Assignments for Practice 1. Sing a diatonic major or minor scale with upper or lower chromatic neighbors to each pitch. EXAMPLE 6.2.3

D

Do 1

Ti 7

Do 1

D

Do 1

Ra 2

Do 1

Re 2

Re 2

Di 1

Re 2

Me 3

Re 2

Mi 3

Mi 3

Ri 2

Fa 4

Mi 3

Mi 3

Fa 4

Fa 4

Mi 3

Fa 4

etc.

Se 5

Fa 4

etc.

2. Arpeggiate through a I–IV–V–I progression, adding upper or lower chromatic neighbors to each pitch.

Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 6.2.1

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 303

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

PITCH PATTERN 6.2.2

PITCH PATTERN 6.2.3

Melodies MELODY 6.2.1

Mässig

MELODY 6.2.2

Gefallig

MELODY 6.2.3

Largo

303

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 304

304

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

MELODY 6.2.4

Presto

MELODY 6.2.5

Quickly

MELODY 6.2.6

Maestoso

MELODY 6.2.7

Largo

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 305

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

MELODY 6.2.8

Moderato

MELODY 6.2.9

Piu adagio

MELODY 6.2.10

Giocoso

MELODY 6.2.11

Risoluto

305

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 306

306

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

MELODY 6.2.12

Allegro

MELODY 6.2.13

Fast and lively

MELODY 6.2.14

Dolente

rit.

MELODY 6.2.15

Sehr rasch

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 307

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

Duets DUET 6.2.1

DUET 6.2.2

Allegro con brio

307

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 308

308

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

DUET 6.2.3

Allegro giocoso

crescendo...

rallentando

Chorale CHORALE 6.2

Misterioso

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 309

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 6.2

Slowly, with regret

Slowly, with regret

309

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 310

310

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

6.3 Modal Mixture Facts You Need to Know Modal mixture is the use of scale degrees from a key’s parallel major or minor mode. Major and minor scales have three scale degrees that differ from each other: the third, sixth, and seventh. When composers “borrow” scale degrees (and the chords they create) into the opposite mode, new possibilities for chord colors result that do not fundamentally change the harmonic structure of the music. Most mixture arises from the borrowing of scale degree 6 from the minor mode into the major mode. This is often used in predominant function to increase a chord’s desire to resolve to the dominant, as when a major subdominant is turned into a minor subdominant or a minor supertonic is made into a diminished supertonic. EXAMPLE 6.3.1

E

Diatonic

Mixture Chord

IV

iv

Diatonic

E

ii

Mixture Chord

ii°

Borrowing scale degree 6 from the minor mode into the diminished seventh chord increases that chord’s desire toward resolution to tonic. EXAMPLE 6.3.2 Mixture Chord

E

vii°7

I

Scale degree 3 is borrowed from the minor to the major in two circumstances: 1. To create a minor tonic. 2. Along with scale degree 6 to create the correct quality of the borrowed submediant triad. Scale degree 3 is frequently borrowed from the major mode into the minor on a final tonic chord, creating what is commonly called a Picardy third.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 311

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

311

EXAMPLE 6.3.3 Mixture Chord

f

V7

I

The lowered scale degree 7 is rarely borrowed in tonal music. Some musicians think of the raising of the leading tone in minor as a form of modal mixture.

Hearing Listen for a chord, usually with predominant function, that has an unusual color. Listen for an intensified desire toward resolution created by adding the lowered sixth scale degree. Listen for the chord quality of the altered chord. If it matches the quality that you would expect in the parallel mode, then it is most likely a borrowed chord.

Singing 1. Begin by singing the requested melody or progression diatonically, without borrowing any tones. 2. You may want to sing through the scale degree patterns, replacing the pattern for the borrowed scale degree with the similar pattern from the parallel mode. Get used to this sound. 3. Sing the melody or progression, inserting the borrowed scale degree. Pay attention to how it changes the musical color and desire toward resolution.

Assignments for Practice Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 6.3.1

PITCH PATTERN 6.3.2

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 312

312

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

PITCH PATTERN 6.3.3

Harmonic Progressions 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

I – IV – iv – V – I i – ii° – V – I I – VI – V – I I – ii – ii° – V – I I – IV – vii°7 – I – V – I

Melodies MELODY 6.3.1

Andante

MELODY 6.3.2

Quickly

MELODY 6.3.3

Allegro non troppo

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 313

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

313

MELODY 6.3.4

Comodo

MELODY 6.3.5

Gently

rit.

MELODY 6.3.6

Boldly

subito

MELODY 6.3.7

Detached

a tempo

molto rallentando

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 314

314

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

MELODY 6.3.8

Presto

MELODY 6.3.9

Moderato

MELODY 6.3.10

Rasch

MELODY 6.3.11

Cheerfully

rit.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 315

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

MELODY 6.3.12

Moderato cantabile

MELODY 6.3.13

Fast waltz tempo

MELODY 6.3.14

Lithely

MELODY 6.3.15

Slowly, with regret

315

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 316

316

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

Duets DUETS 6.3.1

Léger

DUETS 6.3.2

Andante grazioso

rit.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 317

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

DUETS 6.3.3

Lebhaft

rit.

Chorale CHORALE 6.3

317

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 318

318

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 6.3

Tempo di tango

Tempo di tango

6.4 Music from the Literature EXAMPLE 6.4.1 Studies of Caprices of Paganini, Op. 3, No. 4

Allegro

Schumann

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 319

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

319

EXAMPLE 6.4.2 Waltz, Op. 39, No. 4

m. 17-32

Leicht beschwingt

Reinhold

EXAMPLE 6.4.3 Piano Sonata in A Major, K. 331 First movement, Var. 1

Andante grazioso

Mozart

EXAMPLE 6.4.4 Sonata in F Major for Violin and Piano, Op. 24, No. 1 Fourth movement

Violin

Allegro ma non troppo

cresc.

cresc.

Beethoven

`

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 320

320

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

EXAMPLE 6.4.5 Variations on a Theme of Handel, Op. 24, Var. II

Brahms

animato 1.

2.

EXAMPLE 6.4.6 15 Variationen mit Fuge, “Eroica,” Op. 35 A dur Beethoven

Allegretto vivace

Tempo I poco adagio

EXAMPLE 6.4.7 Piano Sonata in G Major, Op. 31, No. 1, Second movement

Adagio grazioso

Beethoven

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 321

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

321

EXAMPLE 6.4.8 Melody for Left Hand, Op. 108, No. 12

Moderato

Ludwig Schytte

Reflections: Creativity Making music is an inherently creative activity. Composers think up music; performers interpret the composer’s intentions; and even the audience gets into the act by trying to understand what the composer and performer are trying to say through music. The types of creativity used by composers and audiences are different. Composers create something new from nothingness. Performers and audiences derive meaning from something presented to them. The creativity of the performer and the audience is the comprehension of another person’s creation or discovery. This form of creativity requires a vocabulary—knowledge of the “rules” that constitute musical style. As we learn more about how music works, about how the common structures that appear in music typically behave, we increase our ability to comprehend music and to recognize instances when we are hearing something new. We become literate in music. Eventually we develop the ability to have original musical thoughts of our own. These original thoughts then lead to the creativity of the composer. This often involves rethinking how traditional musical materials are used. A composer might create sound in a non-traditional way, such as when a percussionist uses a double bass bow on a vibraphone. He or she might rethink the use of pitch, relying on quarter or eighth tones. Or they may rethink the “rules” of harmony, such as when some composers of the early twentieth century started to write atonal music. Each of these requires asking the simple question: “What if?” Creativity is a skill that works best when practiced. As a musician, you are asked to develop both forms of creativity. If you compose or improvise, you are undoubtedly being asked to develop your ability to ask “What if?” The result of this type of activity is often not nearly as important as the process of asking the question. Performers need to develop this form of creativity because our traditional notation system cannot possibly communicate every characteristic of the composer’s intention. One must always bring a part of him or her to the process of realizing somebody else’s music. Likewise, musicians must be good listeners, able to understand what they hear. The ability to follow someone else’s creative path is essential to becoming an effective musician. After all, as performers, ultimately our job is to facilitate communication between the composer (or his composition) and the audience. How then to practice this skill? Creativity requires some freedom to ask “What if?” without fear of failure. That is what your time as a student musician is all about. You are in a safe environment where experimental failures are not only expected—they are encouraged. Development of creativity also requires you to learn and assemble a toolbox of structures and techniques that you have learned and can recognize. Remember that you are building a vocabulary of musical images, and you are learning to speak in the language of music!

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 322

322

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

6.5 Dictation Materials I. Identification of Minor Scale Degrees

Your teacher will establish a key and then play its scale degrees in random order or as a specific pitch in a melody (by number—first, second, last, or by position—high or low). Identify each by writing its number in the appropriate space. Place an up arrow in front of scale degree 6 or 7 if you hear either of them in their raised position. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ II. Identification of Major Scale Degrees

Your teacher will establish a key and then play its scale degrees in random order or as a specific pitch in a melody (by number—first, second, last, or by position—high or low). Identify each by writing its number in the appropriate space. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 323

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

323

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ III. Interval Identification

Your teacher will play several intervals. Identify their quality and size as one of the following: M2 = Major second m2 = Minor second M3 = Major third m3 = Minor third P4 = Perfect fourth

TT = Tritone P5 = Perfect fifth M6 = Major sixth m6 = Minor sixth M7 = Major seventh

m7 = Minor seventh P8 = Perfect octave M9 = Major ninth m9 = Minor ninth M10 = Major tenth m10 = Minor tenth

Be sure to make a clear difference between your capital and lower-case Ms. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ IV. Triad Quality Identification

Your teacher will play several triads. Indicate the quality and inversion. Possible answers are M for major, m for minor, and d for diminished. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 324

324

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ V. Seventh Chord Identification

Your teacher will play several seventh chords. Indicate the quality (MM, Mm, mm, dm, or dd) and inversion for each by using the correct figured bass symbol. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ VI. Melodic and Rhythmic Dictation

Your teacher will play a short melody or rhythm. Notate it on the staves below. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 325

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

325

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

VII. Harmonic Dictation

Write the soprano line, bass line, and provide a Roman numeral analysis (including inversional symbols) for the progression you hear on the grand staff below.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 326

326

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Syncopation; Beginning Non-Modulating Chromaticism

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 327

Chapter 7

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

7.1 Irregular Divisions II: Triplets and Duplets in Augmentation and Diminution Facts You Need to Know Diminuted Triplets A triplet in diminution is equal to one division of the beat, as shown in the figure below. Diminuted triplets are notated using the same note value as the subdivision of the beat. EXAMPLE 7.1.1

beat

division

beat

division

beat

division

triplet

triplet

triplet

subdivision

subdivision

subdivision

diminuted triplet

diminuted triplet

diminuted triplet

Diminuted triplets add rhythmic energy to music. When employed over several beats or measures, diminuted triplets act as a textural device, becoming an accompanimental figure that ornaments a melodic line. Play the example below to hear this usage of diminuted triplets:

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 328

328

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

EXAMPLE 7.1.2 Sonata in F Major, K 377, 2nd movement Theme:

Andante

Mozart

Variation 2:

Performing Diminuted Triplets

Counting diminuted triplets as suggested below allows you to reinforce the beat and division while you get the sound of the triplet in your ear. If you have difficulty, begin by clapping divisions while articulating the rhythm, then change to clapping the beat while articulating. EXAMPLE 7.1.3

count: 1

+

2

+

1

+

1

2

3

1

2

3

Augmented Triplets

Augmented triplets occur over two beats, as indicated in the figure below. They are notated using the same note value as the beat. EXAMPLE 7.1.4

beat

multiple

beat

multiple

beat

multiple

augmented triplet

augmented triplet

augmented triplet

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 329

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

329

Augmented triplets have a dramatic musical effect. Because they exist over two beats, the second beat is obscured, creating metric ambiguity. The sense of resistance and pull that results makes these triplets emphatic and bold. Performing Augmented Triplets

In order to perform augmented triplets, it is necessary to be able to feel the “missing” (or obscured) beat; in essence, you need to be able to feel 2:3. Practice this skill by clapping one-beat triplets while articulating augmented triplets, as shown in the example below. (This exercise creates a 2:1 ratio, which will help you to be able to hear exactly how the augmented triplet fits in the meter.) After performing this exercise with triplets, repeat immediately, this time practicing by clapping just beats, as shown. EXAMPLE 7.1.5

count : 1

clap:

2

1

2

Rhythms RHYTHM 7.1.1

Allegro

RHYTHM 7.1.2

Vivace

3

3

4

5

1

6

2

1

3

2

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 330

330

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

RHYTHM 7.1.3

Andante con moto

RHYTHM 7.1.4

Martial

RHYTHM 7.1.5

Lente

rit.

RHYTHM 7.1.6

Very fast

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 331

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

RHYTHM 7.1.7

Adagietto

RHYTHM 7.1.8

Nicht zu schnell

RHYTHM 7.1.9

Maestoso

RHYTHM 7.1.10

With authority

331

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 332

332

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

RHYTHM 7.1.11

Moderato

RHYTHM 7.1.12

Gedehnt

RHYTHM 7.1.13

Vif

RHYTHM 7.1.14

Quasi allegro

RHYTHM 7.1.15

Larghetto

RHYTHM 7.1.16

Andante grazioso

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 333

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

333

RHYTHM 7.1.17

Allegro

RHYTHM 7.1.18

Moderato

rit.

RHYTHM 7.1.19

Andantino

espressivo

calando

RHYTHM 7.1.20

Vif

subito

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 334

334

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

Two-part Rhythms TWO-PART RHYTHM 7.1.1

Allegro

TWO-PART RHYTHM 7.1.2

Moderato, quasi andante

Three-part Rhythms THREE-PART RHYTHM 7.1.1

Lento

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 335

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

335

THREE-PART RHYTHM 7.1.2

Andante con moto

7.2 Secondary Dominants and Leading Tone Chords Facts You Need to Know Secondary function is a form of tonicization, or temporary creation of the feeling of tonic in a non-tonic scale degree. The most common secondary functions are secondary (sometimes called applied) dominants. Secondary dominants are created by changing a diatonic triad to one of the dominant chord qualities: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Major triads that function like V to the tonicized scale degree. Diminished triads that function like vii°. Major-minor (dominant) seventh chords that function like V7. Diminished seventh chords (half or fully) that function like viiø7 or vii°7.

In general, this means that you are either creating a leading tone to the tonicized scale degree by raising a pitch, or you are creating a fourth scale degree to the tonicized scale degree (the seventh of a dominant seventh chord) by lowering a pitch. Secondary dominants can be used in the same places as the diatonic chords they replace (a V/V acts like the predominant ii it replaces), but they aren’t used to tonicize scale degrees over which diminished chords are built (vii° in major, ii° in minor). They can resolve in any way that a normal dominant can (normally, deceptively, etc.). You can extend a tonicization by using chromatically altered predominants and dominants before arriving at the tonicized scale degree. EXAMPLE 7.2.1

g

i

IV/V

7

V /V

V7

i

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 336

336

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

Hearing Listen for a chromatic tone or chord. If the chromatic tone acts like a leading tone to a diatonic scale degree, then it will be a secondary dominant to the chord built on that scale degree. If the chromatic tone acts like a dominant chord seventh, then it will be a secondary dominant to the chord whose root is a third below the resolution tone.

Singing 1. Begin by singing the diatonic triad for which the secondary dominant chord will substitute. 2. Alter the chord to make it a secondary dominant by either: a. Raising the third of a minor triad to create a major triad (you are creating a new leading tone to the tonicized chord). b. Raising the third and the fifth of a diminished triad to create a major triad. c. Adding a minor seventh to either of the alterations above or to any major triad to create a major-minor seventh chord.

Major Mode EXAMPLE 7.2.2

B

I M7

ii (7)

V7/IV

vi (7)

V(7)/V

V(7)/ii

iii (7)

vii°(ø7)

(7)

V /vi

V(7)/iii

Minor Mode EXAMPLE 7.2.3

g

i7

(7)

ii° (ø7)

V /iv

iv(7)

V(7)/VII

V(7)/V

III(7)

VII(7)

(7)

V /VI

V(7)/III

d. Removing the root from the dominant chord created using the options above to create a diminished triad or seventh chord.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 337

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

337

Major Mode EXAMPLE 7.2.4

ii (7)

vii ø7/IV

I M7

B

vi (7)

vii°(7)/V

vii°(7)/ii

iii (7)

vii°

(7)

vii° /vi

vii°(7)/iii

Minor Mode EXAMPLE 7.2.5

i7

g

(7)

ii° (ø7)

vii° /iv

vii(ø7)/V

vii(ø7)/VII

iv(7)

III(7)

VII(7)

(ø7)

vii /VI

vii(ø7)/III

3. Resolve the secondary dominant chord like you would any dominant or leading tone triad or seventh chord.

Assignments for Practice 1. Sing the circle of fifths progression using seventh chords found below (this is the same progression you learned in Chapter 5). EXAMPLE 7.2.6 Major Mode

IM7

D

IV M7

vii ø7

iii7

vi 7

ii7

V7

I

III M7

VI M7

iiø7

V7

i

Minor Mode

d

i7

iv 7

VII 7

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 338

338

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

Change each chord that can be a secondary function chord into one. For example, inserting a V(7)/V would make the progression sound like: EXAMPLE 7.2.7 Major Mode

IM7

D

IV M7

viiø7

iii7

vi7

V 7/V

V7

I

III M7

VI M7

V 7/V

V7

i

Minor Mode

d

i7

iv7

VII 7

Do this for all chords that can be changed into secondary dominants. Try this in both the major and the minor modes. 2. Do the above exercise, but add in multiple secondary dominants. What happens if every chord that can be made into a secondary dominant is?

Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 7.2.1

PITCH PATTERN 7.2.2

PITCH PATTERN 7.2.3

Harmonic Progressions 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

I – V7/IV – ii – V7/V – V — I i – V7/iv – iv – V7/VII – VII – III – V7/VI – VI – ii° – V – I I – V7/vi – vi – V7/ii – ii – V – vii°/vi – vi – V7/V – V – I I – vii°/ii – ii – viiø7/V – V – I i – V7/iv – V7/VII – V7/III – V7/VI – VI – V7/V – V – i

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 339

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

Melodies MELODY 7.2.1

Langsam

piu

MELODY 7.2.2

Risoluto

MELODY 7.2.3

Allegro

MELODY 7.2.4

Andante

339

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 340

340

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

MELODY 7.2.5

Lightly

MELODY 7.2.6

Moderato

cresc.

MELODY 7.2.7

Majestically

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 341

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

MELODY 7.2.8

Moderato

rit.

MELODY 7.2.9

Lebhaft

leicht

MELODY 7.2.10

Langsam

MELODY 7.2.11

Cantabile

341

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 342

342

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

MELODY 7.2.12

Modéré

MELODY 7.2.13

Andante

MELODY 7.2.14

Moderato

MELODY 7.2.15

Lento

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 343

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

MELODY 7.2.16

Allegretto

MELODY 7.2.17

With movement

MELODY 7.2.18

Thoughtfully

rit.

MELODY 7.2.19

Maestoso

343

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 344

344

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

MELODY 7.2.20

Adagietto

allargando

Duets DUET 7.2.1

Lento

niente

DUET 7.2.2

Andante con moto

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 345

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

DUET 7.2.3

Andante

Chorale CHORALE 7.2

345

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 346

346

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 7.2

Gently, with a lilt

Gently, with a lilt

subito

subito

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 347

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

347

7.3 The Neapolitan Chord Facts You Need to Know Neapolitan chords are major triads built on the lowered second scale degree. They most commonly appear in the minor mode and in first inversion, although root position Neapolitans are not uncommon. When appearing in the major mode, scale degree 6 is found in its lowered, minor position. Neapolitan chords are predominant chords consisting of scale degrees b2, 4, and b6. They are distinguishable by their strikingly dark sound, major quality, and they are usually found in first inversion. When resolving to the dominant, the lowered second scale degree moves down to the leading tone. EXAMPLE 7.3.1

c

N6

4

V2

i

This resolution is sometimes embellished by moving through a cadential six-four chord or a vii°7/V.

Hearing Listen for a chromatic chord that precedes the dominant. Neapolitans will have a very strong and dark sound and will often have scale degree 4 (and sometimes scale degree b2) in the bass.

Singing Know the scale degree your given pitch represents. If necessary, use the scale degree pattern to find tonic, and orient yourself in that key by singing scale degree patterns. Sing the component scale degrees in the correct order. Memorize the resolutions that appear below and be able to sing them from any pitch.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 348

348

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

EXAMPLE 7.3.2

Resolving Directly to Dominant

a

Fa 4

Le 6

Ra 2

Do 1

Resolving through a Cadential

a

Fa 4

Le 6

Ra 2

Le 6

Sol 5

Ti 7

Sol 5

Fa 4

Re 2

Do 1

6 4

Do 1

Me 3

Do 1

Sol 5

Ti 7

Re 2

Ti 7

Do 1

La 6

Do 1

Me 3

Re 2

Do 1

Ti 7

Sol 5

Do 1

Resolving through a vii°7/V

a

Fa 4

Le 6

Ra 2

Le 6

Fi 4

Assignments for Practice Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 7.3.1

PITCH PATTERN 7.3.2

PITCH PATTERN 7.3.3

Harmonic Progressions 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

i – N6 – V7 – i i – N – V7 – i i – VI – N6 – i64 – V7 – i i – VI – N6 – viiø7/V – V7 – i I – I42 – V42 /IV – IV6 – N6 – V – I

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 349

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

Melodies MELODY 7.3.1

With purpose

MELODY 7.3.2

Slowly, with regret

MELODY 7.3.3

Quickly and sneakily

349

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 350

350

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

MELODY 7.3.4

Allegro giocoso

rit.

MELODY 7.3.5

With urgency, but not too fast

MELODY 7.3.6

With humor and spirit

subito

MELODY 7.3.7

Presto

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 351

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

MELODY 7.3.8

Lento

MELODY 7.3.9

Modéré

MELODY 7.3.10

Geschwindt

MELODY 7.3.11

Gefällig

351

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 352

352

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

MELODY 7.3.12

Allegretto

MELODY 7.3.13

Misterioso

MELODY 7.3.14

Buffo

MELODY 7.3.15

Moderato

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 353

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

Duets DUET 7.3.1

Pensieroso

DUET 7.3.2

Pensieroso

353

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 354

354

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

Chorale CHORALE 7.3

Expressively

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 7.3

Adagio cantabile

Adagio cantabile

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 355

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

355

7.4 Augmented Sixth Chords Facts You Need to Know Augmented sixth chords are predominant chords that consist of the minor sixth scale degree (typically in the bass), scale degree 1, and scale degree #4. They get their name from the interval formed between the sixth scale degree and the raised fourth scale degree. An additional tone is often present, giving the chord a unique sound and name. Those names are: Italian French German

No additional tone or doubled scale degree 1 Additional scale degree 2 Additional scale degree 3

EXAMPLE 7.4.1

Italian ( It +6 )

b

French (Fr +6)

German (Gr +6)

These chords arise out of the minor mode, so scale degrees 6 and 3 will appear in their lowered position. These chords lead to the dominant by having scale degrees 6 and #4 move away from each other by half a step to form an octave. The remaining tones usually resolve down by step or stay on the common tone. The remaining tones in the German augmented sixth almost always delay their resolution by one chord, creating a cadential six-four chord. This helps to avoid problems with parallel voice leading. EXAMPLE 7.4.2 French

Italian

g

It +6

V

g

Fr +6

V

German

g

Gr +6

i 64

V

When appearing in the major mode, scale degree 6 will be borrowed from the minor mode. In German augmented sixth chords appearing in the major mode, scale degree 3 will often be enharmonically spelled as #2, reflecting its tendency to resolve up to scale degree 3 in the cadential six-four chord.

EXAMPLE 7.4.3

G

Gr

+6

i 64

V

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 356

356

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

Hearing Listen for a chromatic chord that precedes the dominant. Augmented sixth chords will have scale degree b6 in the bass, and the chromatically altered #4 will slide away from the bass to form an octave.

Singing Your given pitch will generally be the lowered sixth scale degree. If necessary, use the scale degree pattern to find tonic, and orient yourself in that key by singing scale degree patterns. Sing the component scale degrees in the correct order. Typical augmented sixth chords and their resolutions appear in the example below. Memorize and be able to sing these progressions from any note. EXAMPLE 7.4.4 Italian

Le 6 French

Do 1

Fi 4

Le Do Re Fi 6 1 2 4

German

Le Do Me Fi 6 1 3 4

Assignments for Practice Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 7.4.1

PITCH PATTERN 7.4.2

Remainder of Augmented Sixth Chord Resolution

Sol Me Do Sol 5 3 1 5

Sol Ti Re Fa 5 7 2 4

Me Re Do Ti 3 2 1 7

Do 1

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 357

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

PITCH PATTERN 7.4.3

Harmonic Progressions 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

i – It+6 – V7 – i i – ii°6 – Fr+6 – V7 – i i – iv – Gr+6 – i64 – V7 – i i – v6 – iv6 – It+6 – V7 – i I – V42 /IV – IV6 – Gr+6 – I64 – V7 – I

Melodies MELODY 7.4.1

Agitato

MELODY 7.4.2

Moderato

legato

357

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 358

358

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

MELODY 7.4.3

Fast and furious

detached and accented

MELODY 7.4.4

Allegretto

MELODY 7.4.5

Pining

rit.

MELODY 7.4.6

Allegro

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 359

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

MELODY 7.4.7

Moderately

MELODY 7.4.8

Cantabile

MELODY 7.4.9

Langsam

MELODY 7.4.10

Getragen

`

359

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 360

360

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

MELODY 7.4.11

Dolce

calando

MELODY 7.4.12

Not too fast

legato

MELODY 7.4.13

Andante con moto

MELODY 7.4.14

Sassy

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 361

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

MELODY 7.4.15

Quickly, with energy

Duets DUET 7.4.1

Adagio cantabile

DUET 7.4.2

Lente

rit.

361

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 362

362

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

Chorale CHORALE 7.4

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 7.4 Lente

Lente

tres liè

calando

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 363

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

363

7.5 Extended and Altered Dominant Chords Facts You Need to Know Different colorings of the dominant sound can be achieved by stacking additional diatonic thirds on top of the dominant seventh chord. The staff below shows the most common “tall” dominant chords and their resolutions. Notes in parentheses are commonly left out of extended dominant chords. EXAMPLE 7.5.1

V9

V9

I

I

V 11

I

V 13

I

As dominant chords are made taller, they are less likely to appear in inversion. Most dominant ninth, eleventh, and thirteenth chords appear in root position. Dominant chords can also be altered by raising or lowering the chord fifth (scale degree two) by a half step. EXAMPLE 7.5.2

V

5

I

V

5

I

Neither altering the fifth chord nor adding diatonic notes on top of a dominant chord change its function.

Hearing Listen for the dominant quality of the sound and its desire to resolve to tonic. Notice that in most cases, the bass pitch will be scale degree five. Listen for these specific features: Dominant ninths: Listen for scale degree six, often as the highest note of the texture. Dominant elevenths: Listen for the sound of a subdominant triad with scale degree five in the bass. Dominant thirteenths: Listen for scale degree three in the soprano resolving down (sometimes by step through scale degree two) to tonic. Altered dominants: Listen for how the altered scale degree wants to continue to move in the direction of its alteration.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 364

364

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

Singing Know the scale degree content of the chord you are asked to sing. Sing scale degree five in the bass with the other required scale degrees above it.

Assignments for Practice Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 7.5.1

PITCH PATTERN 7.5.2

PITCH PATTERN 7.5.3

Melodies MELODY 7.5.1

Gently rocking, not too slow

rit.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 365

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

MELODY 7.5.2

Allegro giocoso

MELODY 7.5.3

Andante moderato

MELODY 7.5.4

With warmth

365

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 366

366

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

MELODY 7.5.5

Briskly

subito

MELODY 7.5.6

Allegretto

MELODY 7.5.7

Moderato

MELODY 7.5.8

Mit Feuer

with intensity

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 367

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

MELODY 7.5.9

Tranquillo

molto rall.

MELODY 7.5.10

Quickly and gracefully

MELODY 7.5.11

Comodo

367

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 368

368

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

MELODY 7.5.12

Not too fast

MELODY 7.5.13

Lente

MELODY 7.5.14

Allegro

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 369

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

MELODY 7.5.15

Moderato

cantabile

Duets DUET 7.5.1

Cheerfully

DUET 7.5.2

Agitato

369

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 370

370

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

DUET 7.5.3

Agitato

Chorale CHORALE 7.5

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 371

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

371

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 7.5

Moderato

Moderato

rit.

rit.

7.6 Music from the Literature EXAMPLE 7.6.1 m. 313–333

Allegretto moderato

Piano Sonata in C Major, Op. 53, III

cresc.

Beethoven

decresc.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 372

372

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

EXAMPLE 7.6.2 m. 295–318

Molto tranquillo

pp

Sonata in G Major for Violin and Piano, Op. 100, III

Dvorak

dolce

EXAMPLE 7.6.3 m. 23–30

Polka, Op. 39, No. 14 Tchaikovsky

Allegretto

EXAMPLE 7.6.4 “Fugue in E-flat Major,” from The Well-Tempered Clavier, Book 1 J.S. Bach

m. 6–11

EXAMPLE 7.6.5

m. 85–91

Sonata for Piano and Violin, K. 302, I

più

Mozart

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 373

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

373

EXAMPLE 7.6.6 THEMA violin

Andante

Sonata for Piano and Violin, K. 377, II

Mozart

EXAMPLE 7.6.7

Andante espressivo

Piano Sonata in F Minor, Op. 5, No. 3, II

Brahms

EXAMPLE 7.6.8 Little Flower, Op. 205, No. 7

Con moto

cantando

Cornelius Gurlitt

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 374

374

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

EXAMPLE 7.6.9 m. 12-27

Andantino

Minuet

Domenico Scarlatti

cresc.

sub.

cresc.

EXAMPLE 7.6.10

Moderato

Sonata in G, II, “Romance”

Beethoven

cresc.

rit.

a tempo

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 375

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

375

EXAMPLE 7.6.11 Piano Sonata in G Major, Op. 31, No. 1, III

Rondo Allegretto

Beethoven

EXAMPLE 7.6.12 m. 19–27

“Der Müller und der Bach,” from Die schöne Müllerin

Moderato

Schubert

Reflections: Confidence Think about the most skilled performers you know. Are there any characteristics that they seem to share? If you’re like most people, one characteristic on your list is likely to be confidence. Skilled performers put their audience at ease by making everything sound easy. The moment they take the stage, they communicate to their audience that they are in charge, and that the listener need not worry that the performance will turn out all right. Even when the performer wants the audience to believe that the music is incredibly difficult, their demeanor suggests a certain false concern—that they are merely acting to get the desired dramatic effect. Now think back on a performance you attended (not your own) that did not go so well. Did the performer exude confidence as he or she took the stage? Did he or she maintain this level of control throughout the performance? Most likely, the performer communicated his or her uncertainty about the performance that the audience innately read and understood. The end result: a less than satisfying performance. Audiences seem to be very attuned to the confidence level of the performer, and it directly affects their enjoyment of the music. When the performer demonstrates confidence, the audience is at ease and able to enjoy the music. When the performer seems uncertain, then the audience experiences the discomfort of the performer and is less able to enjoy the music. Confidence occurs when preparation, experience, vision, passion, and communication come together. Preparation is perhaps the key element of confidence. Preparation suggests that during practice you have worked out all of the difficult elements so that you know how you will execute them during the performance.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 376

It suggests that you have achieved a level of comfort with your decisions regarding technical and musical presentation, so that you know exactly what you will do and when you will do it to execute as good a performance as you can. Surprises are a certainty when it comes to performance. Preparation involves dealing with unexpected mistakes as they arise during practice and figuring out ways to work through them. Preparation means that, when you take the stage, you know that you have done all you could do to present the performance that you want. Experience is a second element of confidence. The more you do something, the more comfortable you will be doing it again. In terms of musical performance, the only way to gain experience is through performing. The key element of gaining experience, however, is getting used to presenting well-prepared and successful performances. Simply getting on stage and playing does no good if your performances are not thoughtful, well prepared, and musically and emotionally satisfying to you. Vision is the ability to see how the audience should experience the performance and to make that image reality. Successful performers understand what makes a performance work and how to make their vision a reality. This skill can be developed by thoughtfully and critically watching others’ performances and modeling your stage presence after what you see and like (this is one reason most colleges have a performance attendance requirement!). Successful performers love to perform. They couldn’t imagine doing anything else with their life. Even though they may play the same piece in public for years, their exploration of the music and their passion for performing it never wanes—their performances still sound fresh and new. Performance is a medium of communication. One must have something to say in order to have a successful performance, and then he or she must say it so that the audience understands. Can confidence be learned? Mostly yes. Preparation, experience, and vision are matters that are in your control. Communication comes from studying music through performance, analysis, and thoughtful listening. The only element that seems innate (either you have it or you don’t) is passion. If you’ve made it this far in your musical career, chances are you have it (otherwise you would have studied something else in college!). Notice how most elements are in your control. That means it is your responsibility to cultivate and practice these skills and attributes to become a seasoned and confident performer.

7.7 Dictation Materials I. Identification of Minor Scale Degrees

Your teacher will establish a key and then play its scale degrees in random order or as a specific pitch in a melody (by number—first, second, last, or by position—high or low). Identify each by writing its number in the appropriate space. Place an up arrow in front of scale degree 6 or 7 if you hear either of them in their raised position. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 377

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

377

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ II. Identification of Major Scale Degrees

Your teacher will establish a key and then play its scale degrees in random order or as a specific pitch in a melody (by number—first, second, last, or by position—high or low). Identify each by writing its number in the appropriate space. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ III. Interval Identification

Your teacher will play several intervals. Identify their quality and size as one of the following: M2 = Major second m2 = Minor second M3 = Major third m3 = Minor third P4 = Perfect fourth

TT = Tritone P5 = Perfect fifth M6 = Major sixth m6 = Minor sixth M7 = Major seventh

m7 = Minor seventh P8 = Perfect octave M9 = Major ninth m9 = Minor ninth M10 = Major tenth m10 = Minor tenth

Be sure to make a clear difference between your capital and lower-case Ms.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 378

378

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ IV. Triad Quality Identification

Your teacher will play several triads. Indicate the quality and inversion. Possible answers are M for major, m for minor, and d for diminished. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ V. Seventh Chord Identification

Your teacher will play several seventh chords. Indicate the quality (MM, Mm, mm, dm, or dd) and inversion for each by using the correct figured bass symbol. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 379

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ VI. Melodic and Rhythmic Dictation

Your teacher will play a short melody or rhythm. Notate it on the staves below. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

379

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 380

380

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 381

Triplets and Duplets; More Non-Modulating Chromaticism

381

VII. Harmonic Dictation

Write the soprano line, bass line, and provide a Roman numeral analysis (including inversional symbols) for the progression you hear on the grand staff below. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 382

Chapter 8

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

8.1 Divisions of the Beat into Numbers Greater than Four Facts You Need to Know The groupings in this class of irregular divisions include those that occur in groups of four or more; they are found in simple or compound meter. Each of these groupings is equal to one beat.

The examples below show the irregular divisions in this class. Simple Meter EXAMPLE 8.1.1

Beat

Division Triplet

Subdivision

Quintuplet

Sextuplet

Septuplet

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 383

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

383

Compound Meter EXAMPLE 8.1.2

Beat

Duplet Division

Quadruplet

Quintuplet

Subdivision

Septuplet

In simple meter, the groupings of 5 (quintuplet), 6 (sextuplet), and 7 (septuplet) serve primarily as a rhythmic flourish or melodic embellishment. In compound meter, the groupings of 4 (quadruplet) and 5 (also a quintuplet) are faster than the regular division of the beat, and therefore have a stronger sense of resistance; these groups “fight” the natural metric divisions. The septuplet, on the other hand, is more akin to its simple meter counterpart, acting as a flourish or embellishment in a passage. Performing Large Groupings of Irregular Division

When performing these large groups of divisions: 1. Listen for evenness: each note should be the same length. 2. Avoid reorganizing the group: make sure a quintuplet is exactly that, not a group of 2+3. 3. Keep the tempo steady. (It’s easy to make an accelerando or ritardando toward the end of a group as you realize you’ve started too slow or too fast; know the tempo in advance and keep to it!) Practice technique: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Set a metronome to a slow beat (quarter=60 or slower); clap and articulate the beat. At the same tempo, clap the beat, articulate divisions. Repeat, clapping a triplet, then groups of 4, 5, 6, and 7. Repeat each individual group until you are able to perform it accurately at least four times in a row. Write down a group of numbers between 1 and 7. (For example, 3–1–4–7–5.) Set a metronome, then clap the beat and perform the grouping you wrote. Repeat at a variety of tempi.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 384

384

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

Rhythms RHYTHM 8.1.1

Andante cantabile

RHYTHM 8.1.2

Schnell

RHYTHM 8.1.3

Allegretto

rit.

RHYTHM 8.1.4

Quickly

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 385

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

RHYTHM 8.1.5

Larghetto

RHYTHM 8.1.6

Langsam

RHYTHM 8.1.7

Con brio

RHYTHM 8.1.8

Andante

385

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 386

386

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

RHYTHM 8.1.9

Evenly

RHYTHM 8.1.10

Allegretto grazioso

RHYTHM 8.1.11

Mässig

RHYTHM 8.1.12

Vif tres léger et pianissimo

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 387

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

387

RHYTHM 8.1.13

Allegro ma non troppo

rit.

RHYTHM 8.1.14

Vivace

RHYTHM 8.1.15

Belebt

Two-part Rhythms TWO-PART RHYTHM 8.1.1

Adagio tranquillo

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 388

388

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

TWO-PART RHYTHM 8.1.2

Einfach

Three-part Rhythm THREE-PART RHYTHM 8.1

Slowly first time; fast second time

8.2 Reading in Other Clefs Facts You Need to Know Our notational system has evolved so that any line or space can represent any note name, depending upon which of the three clefs is used and where it is placed. While treble and bass clefs are by far the most common in our notational system, followed by alto and tenor, there exist three other clefs which one might occasionally come across. They are the soprano clef, the mezzo-soprano clef, and the baritone

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 389

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

389

clef. Each of these clefs is demonstrated below. Notice that there are two possible ways to write the baritone clef, but that the placement of notes on the staff is the same, regardless of which is used. EXAMPLE 8.2.1

G4

D5

Baritone Clef

Mezzo-Soprano Clef

Soprano Clef A5

C4

G4

or

F3

C4

These clefs are most commonly found in old editions of sheet music and in the original notation of music composed before 1700. This may lead you to wonder why a contemporary musician would need to learn them. Knowing all seven clefs is a valuable tool for transposition. If you can read all of the clefs fluently, then you can transpose any part to any key simply by visualizing it in the appropriate clef because any line or space can represent any note name. This method is more reliable than transposing each note as you go. EXAMPLE 8.2.2

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

Reading in the Soprano, Mezzo-Soprano, and Baritone Clefs

Just as with the treble and bass clefs, begin to develop reading fluency by selecting two or three lines to use as “reference points” on the staff. Relate other pitches to these reference points until you develop fluency reading all of the pitches on the staff.

Assignments for Practice 1. Go back to the early chapters of this text and read each exercise as if it were written in any of the seven clefs. Figure out what transpositions you might be applying. 2. When practicing your instrument, play all exercises in the notated clef, then repeat in one or two of the other clefs. Get used to reading each clef on your instrument. Always start with your weakest clef.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 390

390

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

8.3 Modulation to Closely Related Keys Facts You Need to Know Modulation is the changing of tonal centers within a composition. It differs from tonicization in that it feels more permanent, usually because the new key is established through a strong cadence or by the length of time the music stays there. The most frequent modulations are to closely related keys: those whose key signatures are the same or within one accidental of each other, or the keys of the major or minor triads found diatonically in the original key. Modulation to a closely related key occurs through chromatically adjusting pitches in the original key so that they become the pitches that are unique to the new key. When starting in the major mode, the following alterations can yield modulation to the following key areas, if followed by an appropriately strong cadence: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Supertonic: raise scale degree 1 (e.g., C major to D minor). Mediant: raise scale degree 2 (e.g., G major to B minor). Subdominant: lower scale degree 7 (e.g., D major to G major). Dominant: raise scale degree 4 (e.g., F major to C major). Submediant or relative minor: raise scale degree 5 (e.g., E major to C# minor).

Here are the alterations when starting in the minor mode: 1. Mediant or relative major: use the subtonic instead of the leading tone (e.g., B minor to D major). 2. Subdominant: lower scale degree 2 and/or add the leading tone in the new key (e.g., A minor to D minor). 3. Dominant: raise scale degree 6 and/or add the leading tone in the new key (e.g., E minor to B minor). 4. Submediant: lower scale degree 2 (e.g., C minor to Ab major). 5. Subtonic: raise scale degree 6 (e.g., F to Eb major). Notice that the chromatic alteration usually takes the form of a leading tone to the new tonic or a dominant chord seventh to the new scale degree 3. You may at times find it easy to re-label a chord or scale degree that occurs in both keys. Find the new tonic, and then hear the music in relation to this new tonic. When singing with a relative syllable system (movable-“do” or scale degree numbers), look for where the new leading tone or dominant chord seventh occurs and change your syllables or numbers to the new key at that note. This new syllable will usually be “ti” (7) or “fa” (4).

Hearing Listen first for the chromatic pitches that signal the shift in key. Note whether the chromatic pitch is a leading tone pointing toward the new tonic or dominant chord seventh pointing toward the new scale degree 3. Determine the scale degree of the new tonic relative to the original key.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 391

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

391

Hear the music in the original key up to the modulation and in the new key following the modulation. Note that you may have to work backwards to notate what happens after the modulation.

Singing Visually scan the music for indications of modulation. Look for accidentals that show up consistently following their first appearance. Determine the new tonic. Alter the pitch in the scale that points to the new tonic. Determine the correct syllable or scale degree number to sing as it relates to the new key.

Assignments for Practice Practice singing a setup in the original key, then singing a scale or scale fragment that includes the chromatic alteration that results in a modulation to the new key. Sing a setup in the new key, then sing another scale or fragment that takes you back to the original key. The example below illustrates a modulation from a major key to the relative minor and back: EXAMPLE 8.3.1 Original Key Setup

E

Do Re Do Mi Re Do Fa Mi Do Sol Mi Do La Sol Mi Do 1 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 1 5 3 1 6 5 3 1

Ti Do 7 1

Ti Do 7 1

Ti Do Sol Do 7 1 5 1

Transition to Relative Minor

c

Me 3 New Key Setup

Re 2

Do 1

Do Re Do Me Re Do Fa Me Do Sol Me Do Le Sol Me Do Te Le Sol Me Do Ti Do La Ti Do Sol Do 1 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 1 5 3 1 6 5 3 1 7 6 5 3 1 7 1 6 7 1 5 1

Transition back to Relative Major

E

La 6

Ti 7

Do 1

Original Key Setup Again

Do Re Do Mi Re Do Fa Mi Do Sol Mi Do La Sol Mi Do 1 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 1 5 3 1 6 5 3 1

Ti Do 7 1

This example takes you from a major key to its dominant and back:

Ti Do 7 1

Ti Do Sol Do 7 1 5 1

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 392

392

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

EXAMPLE 8.3.2 Original Key Setup

E

Do Re Do Mi Re Do Fa Mi Do Sol Mi Do La Sol Mi Do 1 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 1 5 3 1 6 5 3 1

Ti Do 7 1

Ti Do 7 1

Ti Do Sol Do 7 1 5 1

Transition to the Dominant

B

Fa Sol 4 5 Setup in the Dominant

Do 1

Re Do 2 1

Mi Re Do 3 2 1

La 6

Fa Mi Do 4 3 1

Ti 7

Sol Mi Do 5 3 1

Do 1

La Sol Mi Do 6 5 3 1

Ti Do 7 1

Sol Do 5 1

Transition back to Original Key

E

Sol 5

Fa 4

Mi 3

Re 2

Do 1

Original Key Setup Again

Do Re Do Mi Re Do Fa Mi Do Sol Mi Do La Sol Mi Do 1 2 1 3 2 1 4 3 1 5 3 1 6 5 3 1

Ti Do 7 1

Ti Do 7 1

Ti Do Sol Do 7 1 5 1

Come up with similar patterns for modulations to other closely related keys. Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 8.3.1

PITCH PATTERN 8.3.2

PITCH PATTERN 8.3.3

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 393

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

Harmonic Progressions 1. I – ii – V – I – IV ii – V – I VI – ii° – V – i – iv 2. I – vii° – I vi – ii – V – I IV – V – I – ii 3. I – V – I – IV ii – V – I I – ii – V – I – vi 4. i – iv – VII i – ii° – V – i III – VI – ii° – V – i – iv 5. i – iv – VII i – ii° – V – i V – I – IV – V – I – IV – vii° – iii

Melodies MELODY 8.3.1

With intensity

MELODY 8.3.2

Grazioso

393

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 394

394

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

MELODY 8.3.3

Molto allegro

MELODY 8.3.4

Boldly

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 395

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

MELODY 8.3.5

Morbidly, slowly

MELODY 8.3.6

Martial

MELODY 8.3.7

Behaglich

395

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 396

396

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

MELODY 8.3.8

With much joy

MELODY 8.3.9

Penserioso

MELODY 8.3.10

Con brio

cresc.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 397

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

MELODY 8.3.11

Allegretto

rit.

MELODY 8.3.12

Presto

leggerio

cresc.

MELODY 8.3.13

Happily

397

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 398

398

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

MELODY 8.3.14

Andante espressivo

MELODY 8.3.15

Modéré

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 399

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

Duets DUET 8.3.1

Lebhaft

DUET 8.3.2

399

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

400

Page 400

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

DUET 8.3.3

Lebhaft

cresc.

Chorale CHORALE 8.3

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 401

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

401

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 8.3

Quickly

Quickly

rit.

rit.

8.4 Diatonic Modulation to Distantly Related Keys Facts You Need to Know Modulations to distantly related keys involve the changing of multiple accidentals from the original key. While some modulations might involve changing only two accidentals, others to more distant areas might involve altering six of the seven pitches in the scale!

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 402

402

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

More notes with different accidentals means that the chromatic pitch or pitches that introduce the modulation may be a variety of scale degrees in the new key, not just the new leading tone or dominant chord seventh.

Hearing Listen for the chromatic pitch or pitches that introduce the modulation. Retain your original tonic until you hear a confirming cadence in the new key, then compare the interval between the old and new key. Use this to determine the new key. Listen forward from the beginning up to the modulation to write the beginning of the music, then determine which scale degree the first pitch in the new key represents (or which Roman numeral of the chord if hearing a harmonic progression) to start hearing the music in the new key.

Singing Find the chromatic alteration that represents the modulation. Find the confirming cadence that follows it to determine what scale degree it represents in the new key. Sing up to this pitch in the original key, then relabel the first chromatic pitch or, if it makes musical sense, a different pitch nearby, in the new key. Be aware of the interval qualities and sizes as you sing scale degrees in the new key.

Assignments for Practice Give yourself two key names (like G major and B major) and see if you can figure out a smooth way to modulate back and forth between them.

Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 8.4.1

PITCH PATTERN 8.4.2

PITCH PATTERN 8.4.3

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 403

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

Harmonic Progressions 1. I – IV – vii° – V IV – V – I – V – I 2. i – VI – iv iii – VI – ii – V – I 3. I – ii – V – vi – IV VII – iv – V – i

Melodies MELODY 8.4.1

Con forza

MELODY 8.4.2

Lebhaft

403

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 404

404

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

MELODY 8.4.3 Grazioso

sempre legato

MELODY 8.4.4 Lento

MELODY 8.4.5 Arpeggione

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 405

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

MELODY 8.4.6

Allegro

MELODY 8.4.7

Swinging

piu

piu

MELODY 8.4.8

Smoothly

405

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 406

406

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

MELODY 8.4.9

Quickly

MELODY 8.4.10

With speed

MELODY 8.4.11

Morbidly

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 407

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

MELODY 8.4.12

Allegro

leggiero

calando a tempo

MELODY 8.4.13

Tempo di tango

407

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 408

408

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

MELODY 8.4.14

Innocently

poco rit.

MELODY 8.4.15

Joyfully

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 409

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

409

Duets DUET 8.4.1

Presto

leggerio

cresc.

dim.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 410

410

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

DUET 8.4.2

Andantino grazioso

cresc......

Chorale CHORALE 8.4

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 411

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 8.4

Thoughtfully

Thoughtfully

411

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 412

412

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

8.5 Music from the Literature EXAMPLE 8.5.1 Piano Sonata in G Major, Op. 79, II Beethoven

Andante

espressivo

EXAMPLE 8.5.2 Waltz, Op. 39, No. 8

Vivace

Tchaikovsky

EXAMPLE 8.5.3 “Prelude No. 9 in E Major,” from The Well-Tempered Clavier, Book I J.S. Bach

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 413

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

413

EXAMPLE 8.5.4 Sonata in C Major, Pastorale

Andante

Scarlatti

EXAMPLE 8.5.5 Aria from Rodelinda, Regina de Longobardi m. 36–50

Handel

EXAMPLE 8.5.6 From Symphony No. 104, "London," I m. 40–64

Haydn

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 414

414

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

EXAMPLE 8.5.7 “Tuba Mirum,” from Requiem, K. 626 m. 9–18

Mozart

Andante

EXAMPLE 8.5.8 “Fugue No. 4 in C-sharp Minor,” from The Well-Tempered Clavier, Book I m. 35–41

J.S. Bach

EXAMPLE 8.5.9 From Symphony No. 5 in C Minor, Op. 67, IV

m. 26–41

Beethoven

Allegro maestoso

sempre

EXAMPLE 8.5.10 From Impromptu in C Minor, Op. 90, No. 1 m. 33–41

Allegro molto moderato

Schubert

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 415

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

415

Reflections: Performance Preparation Popular culture usually gives the impression that musicians don’t need to work hard to get ready for performance. In reality, every minute of performance results from hours of study and practice. Performance preparation begins long before the actual performance date. As you learn new music, it is important to set a timeline for practice. Set specific goals for learning sections of music, working out technical and musical difficulties, and, if appropriate, memorizing. Learning music often requires “breathing time,” time to consider, reconsider, and integrate ideas for communicating the music. The great Polish harpsichordist Wanda Landowska is reported to have described practice as “organizing the intuition.” This suggests that although we approach music in an intuitive way, an effective performer doesn’t leave the ultimate musical decisions to chance. The musical choices one makes are largely choreographed and selected ahead of time, sometimes through trial and error, but more effectively through careful consideration. On the other hand, some of the most electrifying performances occur when the performer suddenly has an epiphany about the piece (perhaps even mid-performance!). Be open to changes in your understanding of the music’s story. It is often a good idea to do periodic run throughs of your entire program. Every few weeks, play the entire program from start to finish in order to get a sense of where you need to focus in your work. Try as much as possible to follow your performance-day routines and habits, and allow unexpected mistakes to occur, so that you can practice adjusting to the inevitable unexpected moments that creep up in performance. Recording practice sessions is also an excellent idea, as it allows you to spend time experiencing your program as an active listener. You might be amazed at how much you miss because of the technical distractions that are inherent in the act of performance. As suggested above, it is a good idea to develop a routine for the time immediately preceding the performance. For some musicians, this “routine” starts a few minutes before the performance. Others start it the morning of the performance; yet others start it a week before. Most musicians use this short-term preparation time to take steps to reduce stress and anxiety. For example, many performers start to reduce the intensity of their practice sessions in the days immediately before a performance. Virtually all work to find a way to ensure a good night’s sleep and adequate nourishment in the days before the performance. Many plan their travel schedules so that they arrive at the concert venue a day or two early. As the concert approaches, be prepared to delegate the little details to someone else. Be prepared to “let go” of the little details so you can spend your time visualizing how you’d like your successful performance to sound. Most of all, remember that you got into this business to have fun doing something that you love. Keep that in mind, visualize success, and trust in your preparation.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 416

416

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

8.6 Dictation Materials I. Chord Identification

Your teacher will play several chords. Indicate the quality and inversion for each by using the correct figured bass symbol. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ II. Melodic and Rhythmic Dictation

Your teacher will play a short melody or rhythm. Notate it on the staves below. Be sure to adjust pitches using accidentals following modulations. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 417

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

417

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 418

418

Triplets; Other Clefs; Beginning Modulation

III. Harmonic Dictation

Write the soprano line, bass line, and provide a Roman numeral analysis (including inversional symbols) for the progression you hear on the grand staff below. Be sure to mark modulations. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 419

Chapter 9

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

9.1 Reading Complex Rhythms Facts You Need to Know Complex rhythms are those that utilize second division of the beat or greater, are permeated with syncopation or rests, and/or are written in less commonly used meters. Visually, these rhythms may appear to be more difficult to read and perform, but, in essence, they simply require a strategy implemented consistently in order to execute them accurately and musically.

Performing Complex Rhythms

When you encounter a rhythm you cannot perform intuitively, use these techniques to decipher it. Note that you may have used many of these techniques previously as you worked through the rhythm chapters of this text. 1. Determine the smallest note value you will count. For example, if the rhythm uses numerous 32nd and 64th notes, you may need to count 16th notes rather than quarters or eighths. 2. Draw lines or indicate beats and/or divisions with an “x” in the score; they will serve as a guidepost and allow your intuition to work with your intellect as you learn the rhythm, as shown in the example below: EXAMPLE 9.1.1

3. If the rhythm has numerous ties, employ the above techniques, then practice the rhythm without the ties. Repeat immediately, with ties. 4. If the rhythm has numerous rests, mark beats. Practice by supplying sound where the rests occur in your inner hearing to ensure accuracy.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 420

420

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

5. Practice the rhythm in small groups—one or two measures at a time, if necessary, and always practice to the first beat of the next measure so that you reinforce the crusis of the measure. 6. If the rhythm utilizes an irregular division you cannot feel intuitively, isolate it, practicing it individually, then surrounded by the division (or beat) from which it is derived, then put it in the context of the rhythm. This process is outlined in the example below: EXAMPLE 9.1.2

original rhythm

isolated triplet

triplet with division

triplet in context of original rhythm

Rhythms RHYTHM 9.1.1

Andantino

RHYTHM 9.1.2

Grave

RHYTHM 9.1.3

Comodo

rit.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 421

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

RHYTHM 9.1.4

Largo

rit.

RHYTHM 9.1.5

Allegro non troppo

RHYTHM 9.1.6

Con moto

RHYTHM 9.1.7

Belebt

421

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 422

422

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

RHYTHM 9.1.8

Presto

RHYTHM 9.1.9

Con fuoco

RHYTHM 9.1.10

Allegro con brio

RHYTHM 9.1.11

Giocoso

RHYTHM 9.1.12

Adagio

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 423

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

423

RHYTHM 9.1.13

Lente

RHYTHM 9.1.14

Andantino

RHYTHM 9.1.15

Bewegt

rit.

9.2 Direct, Chromatic, and Enharmonic Modulation Facts You Need to Know A direct modulation is an unprepared modulation. They often happen at the beginning of phrases, but you may sometimes experience them within a phrase. Direct modulations require you to be able to sing the interval that separates the last note in the old and the first note in the new key, and then to quickly reorient yourself in the new key. EXAMPLE 9.2.1

Unprepared shift to d minor.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 424

424

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

The modulations we have studied so far all rely on the recharacterization of elements (notes or chords) that are common to both the original key and the destination key. In a chromatic modulation, the transitional chord is chromatic in one of the two keys. This chromaticism may take the form of any of the chromatic structures you have studied, including secondary function or modal mixture. EXAMPLE 9.2.2

F

V 7 /V

C

V7

Enharmonic modulation relies on the same technique as most modulation—the recharacterization of an element that is common to both keys. In an enharmonic modulation, however, at least one of the common elements must be enharmonically respelled to lead to the new key. The most common enharmonic modulations involve: 1. Single pitches: a pitch is treated like its enharmonic equivalent. EXAMPLE 9.2.3

D becomes C

D

A

etc.

2. Fully diminished seventh chords: the interval structure sounds the same regardless of whether you treat the lowest pitch as the root, third, fifth, or seventh of the chord. You can modulate to keys a minor third or tritone above or below the original key. EXAMPLE 9.2.4

a

vii°7

f

vii° 65

e

vii° 43

c

vii° 42

3. French augmented sixth chords: respelling this chord enharmonically creates a French augmented sixth in a key a tritone away. EXAMPLE 9.2.5

g

Fr +6

c

Fr +6

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 425

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

425

4. German augmented sixth chords: these chords have the same sound as dominant seventh chords and can be used to modulate to a key a half step above the original key. EXAMPLE 9.2.6

b

Gr +6

b

V7

5. Dominant seventh chords: as stated above, these chords have the same sound as German augmented sixth chords and can be used to modulate to a key a half step below the original key. EXAMPLE 9.2.7

G

V7

f

Gr +6

Hearing Listen for modulations that sound more abrupt than those you have previously studied. Listen for the context: Does the shift occur unexpectedly (direct)? Does the shift occur on a chord that sounds chromatic (chromatic)? Or does a seemingly “normal” chord resolve unexpectedly (enharmonic)? Determine the interval between the old and new keys, then work forward from the beginning and/or backward from the end to determine the harmonic and melodic content in the old and new key.

Singing Direct: determine the interval that separates the last note of the old key and the first note of the new key. Use your knowledge of intervals to sing the first note in the new key, then quickly reorient yourself in the new key. Chromatic: use the same techniques (recharacterizing elements that are in common to both keys) to shift from the old to the new key. Be aware that what you recharacterize may be a chromatic pitch. Enharmonic: use the same techniques to shift from the old to the new key.

Assignments for Practice Practice the following arpeggiated patterns for each of the enharmonic modulations below: 1. Renaming a root position fully diminished seventh chord into a first inversion diminished seventh chord:

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 426

426

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

EXAMPLE 9.2.8

a

i

vii° 7

vii° 65

f

i

vii°7

e

vii° 65

i etc.

2. Renaming a root position fully diminished seventh chord into second inversion: EXAMPLE 9.2.9

a

i

vii°7

4

e vii° 3

i

a vii°43

vii°7

i

etc.

3. Renaming a root position fully diminished seventh chord into third inversion:

EXAMPLE 9.2.10

a

i

vii°7

4

c vii°2

i

vii° 7

e

vii° 42

i

etc.

4. Renaming a dominant seventh chord as a German augmented sixth: EXAMPLE 9.2.11

a

i

Gr +6

b V

7

i

Gr +6

b

V7

i

etc.

5. Renaming a German augmented sixth chord as a dominant seventh: EXAMPLE 9.2.12

a

i

V7

a Gr

+6

i

V7

g Gr+6

i

etc.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 427

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 9.2.1

PITCH PATTERN 9.2.2

PITCH PATTERN 9.2.3

Harmonic Progressions 1. i – VI – Gr+6 V7 – i – iv – V – i 2. i – iv – vii°7 vii°* – i – iv – V – i *You select the inversion.

3. i – VI – Fr+6 Fr+6* – V – i *Modulate to an enharmonic spelling of the augmented sixth chord.

Melodies MELODY 9.2.1

Moto perpetuo

427

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 428

428

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

MELODY 9.2.2

Allegretto

MELODY 9.2.3

Allegretto

MELODY 9.2.4

Fast and spirited

giocoso

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 429

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

MELODY 9.2.5

Very slow, ponderously

rit.

MELODY 9.2.6

Modéré

MELODY 9.2.7

Triste

429

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 430

430

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

MELODY 9.2.8

Elegantly, relaxed

MELODY 9.2.9

Somberly

MELODY 9.2.10

Nicht zu schnell

allargando

a tempo

rit.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 431

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

MELODY 9.2.11

Gently

MELODY 9.2.12

Not too seriously

431

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 432

432

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

MELODY 9.2.13

Moderato

MELODY 9.2.14

Vif

detachè

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 433

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

MELODY 9.2.15 Tarantella

Duets DUET 9.2.1 Adagio

with sorrow

433

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 434

434

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

DUET 9.2.2

Playfully

scherzando

Fine

D.C. al Fine

Chorale CHORALE 9.2

Very slowly, resonantly

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 435

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 9.2

Joyfully

Joyfully

r.h. light throughout

435

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 436

436

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

9.3 Rapidly Shifting and Unexpected Tonalities Facts You Need to Know Some twentieth-century music retains its overall sense of common practice tonality but stretches the use of that musical language in unexpected ways. One of the common techniques used is that of placing unexpected harmonies or modulations within the music. This technique is called “wrong note technique” by some musicians, because the abruptness of the changes creates a very disjunct and jarring sound, much as when a person plays or sings a wrong note in a more traditional tonal piece of music. This name, however, ignores the fact that in many cases, using the “right” note(s) would rob the music of all of its individuality and interest.

Hearing Listen for a sound that is strikingly jarring, unexpected, and perhaps unsettling in the music. Usually it is a note or chord that is prepared in a traditional way, but the expected resolution created by that preparation does not appear. Work first on figuring out how the actual music varies from the expectation. Next, work on the music in sections, much as you would any modulating melody: start at the beginning or end and work on the parts that seem to “follow the rules” up to the unexpected element, and then following the unexpected element.

Singing Sing the majority of the excerpt as you would any piece of tonal music. Take extra time to figure out how the unexpected element works and why it sounds unexpected. Usually, this will involve the same techniques you used to navigate through direct, chromatic, and enharmonic modulations.

Assignments for Practice Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 9.3.1

PITCH PATTERN 9.3.2

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 437

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

PITCH PATTERN 9.3.3

Melodies MELODY 9.3.1

With energy

MELODY 9.3.2

Misterioso

MELODY 9.3.3

Briskly

MELODY 9.3.4

Briskly

437

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 438

438

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

MELODY 9.3.5

Rasch

MELODY 9.3.6

Very fast

MELODY 9.3.7

Playfully

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 439

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

MELODY 9.3.8

Andante cantabile

rit. MELODY 9.3.9

Allegro giocoso

MELODY 9.3.10

Not too fast

439

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 440

440

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

Duets DUET 9.3.1

Quickly, with humor

DUET 9.3.2

Gently

legato

DUET 9.3.3

With determination

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 441

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

Chorale CHORALE 9.3

Playfully; but not too fast

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 9.3

Awkwardly

Awkwardly

441

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 442

442

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

9.4 Music from the Literature EXAMPLE 9.4.1 Sonata in G Major for Violin and Piano, Op. 100, IV

Allegro molto

Dvorak

EXAMPLE 9.4.2 Sonata in A Minor, "Arpeggione," D. 821, II m. 4–33

Schubert

Adagio

sub.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 443

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

443

EXAMPLE 9.4.3 Mai, Op. 1, No. 2 m. 36-67

Fauré

rall. a tempo cresc.

rall. e dim.

EXAMPLE 9.4.4 Scherzo, Op. 99, No. 3 Joachim Raff

Presto

EXAMPLE 9.4.5 Liebestraum No. 3 in A-flat Major m. 26–37

Più animato con passione

cresc.

Liszt

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 444

444

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

EXAMPLE 9.4.6 Impromptu in G-flat Major, Op. 90, No. 3 Schubert

m. 25–35

decresc.

decresc.

EXAMPLE 9.4.7 Piano Sonata in E Minor, Op. 90, II m. 211–221 Beethoven

Nicht zu geschwind und sehr vortragen

sempre

cresc. - - - - - - - - - - -

EXAMPLE 9.4.8 m. 114–130

Piano Sonata in E Minor, Op. 90, II

Nicht zu geschwind und sehr vortragen

Beethoven

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 445

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

445

EXAMPLE 9.4.9 Gavotte, from Symphony No. 1, "Classical," Op. 25

Non troppo allegro

Sergei Prokofiev

pesant e

© 1926 by Hawkes & Son (London) Ltd. Reprinted by permission of Boosey & Hawkes, Inc.

Reflections: Energy, Space, and Time Time, space, and energy are the media through which music is created, transmitted, and sustained. In order to practice the right skills to make oneself an effective communicator of music, one must have some understanding of how music exists in these media. At its most fundamental level, music is physical energy. Physicists refer to musical pitches in relation to the speed of these waves of energy. The term “A=440” refers to the fact that in order to create a pitch that sounds an A above middle C, one must start the air molecules vibrating at a speed of 440 cycles per second. A faster or slower rate of vibration creates respectively a higher or lower pitch, while more or less energy creates a louder or softer sound. As musicians, we learn to recognize subtle differences in the intensity and speed of musical energy. Energy in music is more complex than just the physics of sound. Musical tension, created through techniques such as dissonance (melodic, harmonic, or metric), acts as a sort of potential energy, creating drive and desire toward a more consonant resolution. In this sense, musical energy is the psychological expectation of resolution. In the hands of a skilled composer, this creation of musical energy is a beautiful and compelling dramatic device. Space implies distance, whether physical or imagined. It also implies a relationship between two or more objects. As such, it is fundamentally relative. Like energy, space manifests itself in music in multiple ways. A single beat is undefined. A second beat creates an expectation of the amount of time between beats. After the second beat, we can expect a third beat to occur at the same temporal distance from the second as the second was to the first.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 446

Pitches, chords, and phrasing also manifest space. We describe pitches as being higher or lower than each other. Chords and keys are closer to or more distant from each other. In short, any musical structure that is measurable or that can be compared to another structure is a manifestation of musical space. Like energy, space has a significant psychological component. In order to project resolution on a sound, we require an understanding of how music works as a system. We learn early on that pitches, rhythms, and chords behave in certain ways because we learn what our musical system demands of these structures, and we learn within a single composition to listen to its beginning more carefully because in that exposition lie the clues to understanding that music’s particular establishment of artistic space. Music is both sustained and nourished by its existence in time. Although the passage of time is constant, we see it only through its “shadows,” or its effects on the tangible world in which we move. We see the growth or decay of a living thing, we see the changing of a picture’s colors as it fades in the sunlight, and we hear the growth and decay of a musical sound. We only sense time through noticing how our physical world changes in it. Time is change itself, and the only way that we sense its passing is through our ability to remember how something once was and how it has changed. We sense a crescendo by remembering the intensity of a sound as it first began, and then by comparing the present perception of it. Time has properties that seem to contradict each other. Time resembles space because it is both measurable and precise. Yet time’s passage is often perceived unevenly. While constantly flowing in a single direction, it is at once fluid and unpredictable—it is the possibility of future becoming rather than the unfolding of a predetermined event. Although we might know what to expect when we hear a performance because we have heard that piece before, there is always the possibility of the unexpected—a missed note, a subtly changed rhythm of phrasing, that creates the intensity and excitement of live performance. Veteran concertgoers who have seen the same great performer multiple times often comment on being surprised by how the music always sounds fresh and new. Such surprise, and the fun and excitement of that experience and discovery, is the magic that drew many of us to a career in music. It is the sustaining and nourishing aspect of this perceived time—the time not of precision but of unexpected becoming, that creates the magic of music. This isn’t to say that “spatialized” time, the time of precision, is unnecessary. On the contrary, it is essential for a musician to master. We often describe a performer whose rhythmic presentation of time seems to be a bit “off” as either “rushing” or “dragging,” creating an unsettling and unpleasant musical experience, while other performers effectively manipulate time through the technique of rubato with little or no complaint, and often even praise, from an audience. How can two very different expressions and experiences explain the same phenomenon? Because this sort of time is measurable, it is also quantifiable. That is, we need to be able to measure out, divide, subdivide, and place musical events on a “timeline.” If one isn’t good at this, he or she is often described as being “early” or “late” in the presentation of his or her musical content. Because it is easily quantifiable, it is easily used as the basis for making objective judgments about the ability of a performer. The time of experience, however, is very different yet equally important. It is the time of change and of memory. It is how music creates a narrative or story and how the listener, composer, and performer make sense of the sounds that they hear. It is the time of hearing and recognizing musical structures as they change throughout the course of a composition. This is the time of aesthetics, where meaning is communicated to the listener through the music.

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 447

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

447

9.5 Dictation Materials I. Chord Identification

Your teacher will play several chords. Indicate the quality and inversion for each by using the correct figured bass symbol. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ II. Melodic and Rhythmic Dictation

Your teacher will play a short melody or rhythm. Notate it on the staves below. Be sure to adjust pitches using accidentals following modulations. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 448

448

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

III. Harmonic Dictation

Write the soprano line, bass line, and provide a Roman numeral analysis (including inversional symbols) for the progression you hear on the grand staff below. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DAS01c.qxd

8/1/10

13:30

Page 449

Reading Complex Rhythms; More Complex Modulation

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

449

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 450

Chapter 10

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

10.1 Changing Meter II: Complex Changing Meter Facts You Need to Know Complex changing meter occurs when the beat structure changes from simple to compound, or vice versa, within a meter change. The number of beats in a measure may or may not change. Some examples of complex changing meter include 34–68 (simple triple to compound duple), 98–24 (compound triple to simple duple) and 44–68 (simple quadruple to compound duple).

Performing Complex Changing Meter

In simple changing meter, the speed of the beat and the divisions remains constant through the meter change; the length of the measure expands or contracts. For example, when changing from 24 to 43, the measure is longer, but the tempo of the beat (quarter note) and divisions (eighth note) remains the same from one meter to the next. In complex changing meter, the relationship from one meter to the next is more intricate. As you move between metric structures, a composer indicates whether the speed of the beat or the divisions will remain constant; the other will change. Imagine you encounter a passage in which the meter changes from 42 (a simple duple meter) to 68 (a compound duple meter), as in the example below. In the top voice, you see divisions, in the bottom, the beats. Above the barline, you see the indication e = e; this means that the speed of the eighth note will remain constant when the meter changes. EXAMPLE 10.1.1

=

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 451

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

451

To execute a changing meter passage in which the division remains constant: 1. Clap eighth notes while articulating the top voice. Your hands and voice should be doing the same thing, and the tempo of the eighth notes should be the same throughout. Although the tempo of the eighth notes is steady, their character should change as you traverse from one meter to the next. If you have difficulty performing this accurately, practice with a metronome. 2. Perform the example again, this time clapping the beats (lower voice) while you articulate divisions. Notice that the beat slows down in the 68 measure; this is because the compound beat has to expand in order to accommodate its three divisions. Conversely, notice that the simple beat feels faster, because you are fitting only two divisions in each beat. Examine the example below. EXAMPLE 10.1.2

=

The note values you see are exactly the same as in the original example, but now you see the notation q = q. above the staff. This indicates that the speed of the beat will remain the same when the meter changes. In this case, the quarter note in 24 will be performed at the same tempo as the dotted quarter in 68. To execute a changing meter passage in which the beat remains constant: 1. Clap the beat while articulating the bottom part. Your hands and voice should be in unison and the speed of the beat should be the same in both meters. 2. Without looking at the example, clap a beat. As you clap, articulate groups of two divisions, then groups of three divisions, and notice the difference in tempo between the two. 3. Return to the example. Clap the bottom voice and articulate the top voice. Your hands will remain steady throughout, but the speed of the divisions will change as you move from 24 to 86. Though the speed of the divisions in 86 will be exactly the same as a simple meter triplet, the character is completely different. The essence of performing complex changing meter passages lies in meticulously portraying the character of each meter. By nature, simple meters are more angular; compound meters rounded with a sense of sway. Accentuating the character of individual meters adds vitality and interest to a performance. 3 4

=

6 8

Changing meter from 43 to 68 deserves special mention. A primary characteristic of music from Latin America, it is a relationship that appears frequently in music. 3 and 68 have a significant characteristic in common—they share the same number of divisions. Because 4 each has six divisions, they can be superimposed, and thus composers will often change between these meters without actually notating the change. Some argue that keeping the division constant when changing from 43 to 68 does not constitute a meter change at all, but rather, it is simply a change in emphasis within the meter, or a hemiola.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 452

452

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

Complex Changing Meter Preparatory Exercises

The following exercises focus on keeping the division constant between two meters. Practice each two ways: first by clapping the divisions (so that they act as a guide), then by clapping the beat while you articulate. EXAMPLE 10.1.3

1.

=

3.

2.

=

4.

=

=

The following exercises focus on keeping the beat constant between two meters. Practice each, first with a metronome, then without. Try to hear the speed of the division before you actually have to change meter—always be aware of 2:3. EXAMPLE 10.1.4

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 453

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

Rhythms RHYTHM 10.1.1

Vivace

=

RHYTHM 10.1.2

Molto moderato

=

RHYTHM 10.1.3

With energy

=

=

=

RHYTHM 10.1.4

With humor

=

453

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 454

454

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

RHYTHM 10.1.5

Animato

=

RHYTHM 10.1.6

Marcato

=

RHYTHM 10.1.7

Lebhaft

=

RHYTHM 10.1.8

Andantino

=

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 455

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

455

RHYTHM 10.1.9

With precision and energy =

=

=

=

=

=

=

RHYTHM 10.1.10

Very slowly

=

RHYTHM 10.1.11

Allegro giocoso

=

`

RHYTHM 10.1.12

Semplice

=

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 456

456

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

RHYTHM 10.1.13

Con moto

=

=

RHYTHM 10.1.14

Fearlessly

=

RHYTHM 10.1.15

With integrity

=

=

=

=

RHYTHM 10.1.16

Andante

=

=

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 457

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

RHYTHM 10.1.17

Vivace

Two-part Rhythms TWO-PART RHYTHM 10.1.1

Behaglich

=

TWO-PART RHYTHM 10.1.2

Misterioso

=

457

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 458

458

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

Three-part Rhythm THREE-PART RHYTHM 10.1

Marcato

=

10.2 Polyrhythms Facts You Need to Know A polyrhythm exists when two or more rhythms occur simultaneously. When a polyrhythm involves superimposing two meters on each other, it is considered a polymeter. Polymeters are also called “cross-rhythms” because they pit indivisible numbers of beats against each other. Polymetric rhythms create metric ambiguity and tension in music because the regular beat and metric structure is completely obscured. By definition, a polyrhythm exists between two voices. Percussionists, pianists, and other keyboard players need to master the skill of performing both voices of a polyrhythm simultaneously. Other instrumentalists need to be able to perform a single voice of a polyrhythm while hearing and feeling the other voice internally.

Types of Polyrhythm

This example shows the most common polyrhythms; though not all-inclusive, it is comprehensive.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 459

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

459

EXAMPLE 10.2.1

2:3

3:2

5:2

4:3

5:3

3:4

5:4

Performing Polyrhythms

There are two approaches to learning to perform polyrhythms accurately. Experiment with each to determine which will work best for you. Method One: Using “Misplaced” Accents

In any polyrhythm, find the lowest common denominator between the two meters. For example, 2:3 has three quarter-note beats against two dotted-quarter beats; each meter has six divisions. Look at the beaming in the 43 example below. In measure one, the stems going up show the grouping in 3 ; the stems going down show 68. The beats of each meter are indicated with an “x.” 4 EXAMPLE 10.2.2 x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Measure two uses of accents to indicate the two beats of 68. To learn to perform 2:3: 1. Clap the three beats of 43 while articulating the six divisions, intentionally stressing the first and fourth divisions, which represent the two beats of 68. You are “misplacing” the natural stresses in 43, replacing them with the 68 beats. 2. Repeat, alternating between clapping the beats of 43 and 86. Continue to hear all six divisions in your head. 3. Repeat again, clapping in 43 while articulating in 68. To perform 3:2, repeat the process, this time using the two beats of 68 as your guide; you will “misplace” the stresses to find the three beats, as shown in the example below. EXAMPLE 10.2.3 x

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 460

460

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

Use the same process for learning 3:4 and the reverse, as well as any other polyrhythm. Simply find the lowest common number of divisions, superimpose the two meters, then articulate with the misplaced accents. Look at 3:4 in the example below; here, the lowest common denominator is 12. The polyrhythm is shown using 128 (four dotted-quarter beats) against 32 (two half-note beats). EXAMPLE 10.2.4 x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Finally, 4:3: EXAMPLE 10.2.5 x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Method Two: Using Composite Rhythms

In this method, you will focus on the beats of each meter. In any polyrhythm, you can superimpose the beats of each meter (or rhythm) to create a new rhythm called a composite rhythm. The composite rhythm is how the two meters sound when performed as a single voice. To discover a composite rhythm, superimpose the divisions in each meter, find the beats, then determine the length of notes between beats. Choose one meter in which to write the rhythm. (It is generally easier to write the rhythm in the meter with the greater number of beats.) The example below shows the composite rhythm for 2:3. EXAMPLE 10.2.6 Soprano voice: x delineates beats in 34 x x

x

x

x

Composite rhythm in 34

Composite rhythm in 68

Bass voice: x delineates beats in 68

Notice that the composite rhythm in 128 and 23 look exactly the same. The rhythm is the same; the metric stresses are different. Also notice that this (and all) composite rhythm is a retrograde of itself; it is exactly the same forward and backward. This phenomenon is true for any composite rhythm. The composite rhythms for 2:5, 3:5, and 4:5, respectively, are below.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 461

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

461

EXAMPLE 10.2.7 Soprano voice: x delineates beats in 182

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

Bass voice: x delineates beats in 32

Composite rhythm in 32

Composite rhythm in 182

EXAMPLE 10.2.8

x

x

Rhythms RHYTHM 10.2.1

Whispered

RHYTHM 10.2.2

Moderato

x

x

x

x

x

x

x

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 462

462

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

RHYTHM 10.2.3

Con brio

RHYTHM 10.2.4

Vif

RHYTHM 10.2.5

Lente

RHYTHM 10.2.6

Calmly

RHYTHM 10.2.7

Andante

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 463

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

463

RHYTHM 10.2.8

Lento

RHYTHM 10.2.9

Allegro

RHYTHM 10.2.10

Con moto

RHYTHM 10.2.11

With energy

subito

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 464

464

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

RHYTHM 10.2.12

Andante

RHYTHM 10.2.13

With precision

lightly and legato

RHYTHM 10.2.14

Cantabile

RHYTHM 10.2.15

Comodo

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 465

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

RHYTHM 10.2.16

Allegro

RHYTHM 10.2.17

Moderato

Two-part Rhythms TWO-PART RHYTHM 10.2.1

Andante con moto

TWO-PART RHYTHM 10.2.2

With ease

465

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 466

466

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

TWO-PART RHYTHM 10.2.3

Moderato

TWO-PART RHYTHM 10.2.4

Andante

Three-part Rhythm THREE-PART RHYTHM 10.2

Lebhaft

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 467

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

467

10.3 Asymmetric Meters Facts You Need to Know An asymmetric meter is one that uses any combination of groupings of 2, 3, and 4 divisions of a beat in a given measure. Beats do not occur at regular intervals, as they do in simple and compound meter, but are of unequal length; the duration of the beat expands and contracts within a measure. In simple and compound meters, beats and divisions are divided and multiplied, resulting in 2:1 or 3:1 relationships within beats. In asymmetric meters, beats become longer or shorter by adding or subtracting divisions within them. Thus, asymmetric beat structures can be considered to use additive rhythms. Additive rhythms occur with great frequency in the traditional music of India. Asymmetric meters are also referred to as unequal beats, complex meter, or composite meters. Though the most prevalent usage of asymmetric meters in classical music occurs in music of the twentieth century and beyond, notable examples occur in music of the Common Practice period, including Tchaikovsky’s Sixth Symphony and Mussorgsky’s Pictures at an Exhibition.

Performing Asymmetric Meters

The most common asymmetric meters include 58, 78, and 88, though many other asymmetric meters exist. Within each asymmetric meter, various permutations may occur. For example, 58 may be manifested as either 2 +8 3or 3 +8.2 For this reason, composers sometimes indicate the groupings specifically in the time signatures. See the examples below. EXAMPLE 10.3.1

If the beat groupings are not indicated in the time signature, the performer must ascertain the groupings by looking at how notes are beamed. Bear in mind that the groupings could shift within a piece to add interest and ambiguity. The time signature in the example below is 78; the beams show that the grouping of measure one is 2+2+3 , measure two, 3 + 82 + 2, measure three, 2 + 83 + 2, and the last measure, 4 +3 . 8 8 EXAMPLE 10.3.2

1 2 1 2 1 2 3

1 2 3 1 2 1 2

1 2 1 2 3 1 2

1 2 3 4 1 2 3

Example two also shows the easiest way to count in asymmetric meters. Simply counting the number of divisions in each groups is uncomplicated and allows a performer to see the difference in character of each group as it expands and contracts.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 468

468

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

Asymmetric Rhythm Reading Rhythms RHYTHM 10.3.1

With energy

RHYTHM 10.3.2

Quickly

RHYTHM 10.3.3

With ease

RHYTHM 10.3.4

Frivolously

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 469

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

RHYTHM 10.3.5

Frivolously

RHYTHM 10.3.6

Moderato

RHYTHM 10.3.7

Grazioso

RHYTHM 10.3.8

Not too fast; precise

469

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 470

470

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

RHYTHM 10.3.9

Andante

RHYTHM 10.3.10

Slowly and thoughtfully

RHYTHM 10.3.11

Lebhaft

= cresc.

rit.

cresc.

RHYTHM 10.3.12

Allegro

=

marcato

=

=

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 471

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

RHYTHM 10.3.13

Allegro

=

RHYTHM 10.3.14

Vif

=

=

=

Two-part Rhythms TWO-PART RHYTHM 10.3.1

Andante

TWO-PART RHYTHM 10.3.2

Moderato

=

471

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 472

472

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

Three-part Rhythm THREE-PART RHYTHM 10.3

Animato

Reflections: Understanding and Appreciating Twentieth-century Music Many people, music students included, are “turned off” when listening to music of the most recent century. They often have difficulty hearing what is beautiful or even fun about much of this music. Few musicians will have the luxury of being able to avoid twentieth-century music altogether throughout their careers. Most will have to perform it, or elements derived from it, at one point or another during their career. Here are some things to keep in mind as you learn how to approach this literature: 1. There is a tremendous variety of musical and compositional styles and languages used in twentieth-century music. Saying that you don’t like one says nothing about how you might like the rest of it. 2. The twentieth century was, by and large, an era of experimentation with the setting of new “rules” for how music might sound. It was an era when composers weren’t afraid to ask, and in many cases were even encouraged to ask “what if?” in regard to their compositional language. 3. Music of the twentieth century is often very personal, intimate, and emotional. The notion of music (and all art, for that matter) as being representative of beauty was replaced in the minds of many composers by the idea that music and art should represent “truth,” whether beautiful or not. 4. Even though it might not sound like it, much twentieth-century music is extremely organized. Conversely, some of it relies on chance and the lack of organization. Try to understand how the music is put together. This will help you to understand how to present it.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 473

5. In general, because no single musical language dominated the twentieth century, and because Common Practice tonality was abandoned or purposely avoided in much of it, this music requires extra care, rehearsal, and thoughtfulness to prepare. It is generally not music that sounds good when it is thrown together. Listen to groups or soloists who specialize in performing literature from this era to get its sound in your ear. 6. While many elements of traditional tonal music were altered or thrown out, many other elements were not. Use what is familiar to your ear (be it rhythm, meter, phrasing, timbre, pitch, etc.) to guide your decisions as to how this music will be performed. 7. In the end, it’s OK to dislike this literature, but be thoughtful and specific about why. Keep in mind that much of this literature, like most music composed in every style period throughout the history of music, will not “survive the test of time” to be performed in our current century. 8. Above all, try to find a part of this literature that appeals to you, and have fun exploring the possibilities for expression and communication within it.

10.4 Dictation Materials Note: This dictation chapter focuses on extra practice for the skills you have already learned. I. Chord Identification

Your teacher will play several chords. Indicate the quality and inversion for each by using the correct figured bass symbol. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 474

474

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

II. Melodic and Rhythmic Dictation

Your teacher will play a short melody or rhythm. Notate it on the staves below. Be sure to adjust pitches using accidentals following modulations. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 475

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

475

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

III. Harmonic Dictation

Write the soprano line, bass line, and provide a Roman numeral analysis (including inversional symbols) for the progression you hear on the grand staff below. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 476

476

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

IV. Identification of Polyrhythms

You will hear several polyrhythms, either as single-line rhythms in a particular meter or as composite rhythms. Identify the polyrhythm that you hear. Your choices are: 2:3

3:2

4:3

3:4

5:2

5:4

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ V. Rhythmic Dictation

Notate the rhythms you hear on the staves below: Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 477

Twentieth-century Rhythmic Techniques

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

477

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 478

Chapter 11

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

11.1 Pentatonic and Blues Scales Facts You Need to Know Pentatonic scales contain five notes separated by major seconds and minor thirds. The arrangement of these intervals is what differentiates the various forms of the pentatonic scale. The two most common pentatonic scales are the major pentatonic and the minor pentatonic scales. The major pentatonic scale is a major scale with scale degrees 4 and 7 removed. EXAMPLE 11.1.1

F

Do 1

Re 2

Mi 3

Sol 5

La 6

Do 1

The minor pentatonic scale is a natural minor scale with scale degrees 2 and 6 removed.

EXAMPLE 11.1.2

f

Do 1

Me 3

Fa 4

Sol 5

Te 7

Do 1

Other pentatonic scales can be heard as a major scale or natural minor scales that are missing two scale degrees:

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 479

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

479

EXAMPLE 11.1.3

Second Species Pentatonic (Based off a Natural Minor Scale)

f

Do 1

Re 2

Fa 4

Sol 5

Te 7

Do 1

Te 7

Do 1

Third Species Pentatonic (Based off a Natural Minor Scale)

f

Do 1

Me 3

Fa 4

Le 6

Fourth Species Pentatonic (Based off a Major Scale)

F

Do 1

Re 2

Fa 4

Sol 5

La 6

Do 1

The blues scale is a minor pentatonic scale with an added raised fourth scale degree. EXAMPLE 11.1.4

f

Do 1

Me 3

Fa 4

Fi 4

Sol 5

Te 7

Do 1

Hearing Use the following steps to identify scale types and music written from them: 1. Identify tonic and whether the scale sounds like it is closer to a major scale, a minor scale, or an atonal scale by listening specifically for the quality of scale degree 3. The major and fourth species pentatonic scales will have a major sound. The minor, second species, third species, and blues scale will have a minor sound. 2. Count the number of notes used in the scale. This may be difficult if only part of the scale is being used. Pentatonic scales will sound as if they have six notes (five unique pitches and an octave duplication). The blues scale sounds as if it has seven notes, with the added note sounding like a chromatic passing tone between scale degrees 4 and 5. 3. Listen for the approach to tonic from below. In most scales, this is an important identifying feature. The most common approaches from below are leading tones (m2), subtonics (M2), or minor thirds. No

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 480

480

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

pentatonic scales use leading tones. The minor, second, and third species and the blues scale have a subtonic. The major and fourth species pentatonics have a minor third below tonic. 4. Listen for altered scale degrees or other identifying characteristics. In the case of pentatonic scales, listen for the notes that seem to be “missing” from the major or minor scale. In the case of the blues scale, listen also for the added chromatic tone between scale degrees 4 and 5.

Singing Use the major or minor scale as your basis for singing pentatonic scales. Remove the appropriate scale degrees. Consult the chart below for determining which scale (major or minor) to use for each pentatonic scale, and which scale degrees to leave out.

Scale Major pentatonic (1st species) Minor pentatonic (5th species) 2nd species pentatonic 3rd species pentatonic 4th species pentatonic Blues

Assignments for Practice Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 11.1.1

PITCH PATTERN 11.1.2

PITCH PATTERN 11.1.3

Basis Major scale Minor scale Natural minor scale Natural minor scale Major Natural minor scale

Leave Out 4 and 7 2 and 6 3 and 6 2 and 5 3 and 7 2 and 6, add a #4

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 481

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

Melodies MELODY 11.1.1

Moderato

MELODY 11.1.2

Moderato

MELODY 11.1.3

Very fast

MELODY 11.1.4

Contemplatively

481

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 482

482

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

MELODY 11.1.5

With serenity

MELODY 11.1.6

Darkly

MELODY 11.1.7

With haste

MELODY 11.1.8

Moderato

cantabile

rit.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 483

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

MELODY 11.1.9

Happily

MELODY 11.1.10

Swinging

MELODY 11.1.11

Wistfully

MELODY 11.1.12

Prestissimo

483

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 484

484

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

MELODY 11.1.13

Allegro but sadly

MELODY 11.1.14

Adagio

rit.

MELODY 11.1.15

Allegro

detatched and heavy

Duets DUET 11.1.1

Andante, serenely

molto rit.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 485

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

DUET 11.1.2

With warmth

DUET 11.1.3

Languidly

485

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 486

486

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

Chorale CHORALE 11.1

Moderato

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 11.1

Nostalgically

Nostalgically

rit.

rit.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 487

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

487

11.2 The Ecclesiastic Modes Facts You Need to Know Modes are scale formations that were the basis of most Western music until the creation of major and minor scales. While the pre-tonal use of modes is very different from our concept of scales, modern modes are generally treated as major or minor scales with one or more altered pitches. Modes returned to somewhat common use in the twentieth century as a means of evoking an “old” sound and as an aid for improvising in jazz music. The original modal system was based on the natural or “white” keys on the keyboard (a Dorian mode consists of all the natural notes starting on D, Phrygian starting on E, etc.). Like scales, modes are fully transposable, so it is best to memorize them as major or minor scales with altered scale degrees. Memorize the chart of the modes below: EXAMPLE 11.2.1

Major-sounding Modes Ionian Major Scale

D

Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Ti Do 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1

Lydian Major Scale with a Raised Fourth Scale Degree

Mixolydian Major Scale with a Lowered Seventh Scale Degree

Do Re Mi Fi Sol La Ti Do 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1

Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Te Do 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1

Minor-sounding Modes

d

Aeolian Natural Minor Scale

Dorian Natural Minor Scale with a Raised Sixth Scale Degree

Do Re Me Fa Sol Le Te Do 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1

Do Re Me Fa Sol La Te Do 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1

Phrygian Natural Minor Scale with a Lowered Second Scale Degree

Do Ra Me Fa Sol Le Te Do 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1

Locrian Natural Minor with Lowered Second and Fifth Scale Degrees

d

Do 1

Ra 2

Me 3

Fa 4

Se 5

Le 6

Te 7

Do 1

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 488

488

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

Hearing Like all scales, listen for 1) the modality (major or minor), 2) the number of pitches (all modes sound as if they have 8 pitches), 3) the approach to tonic from below, and 4) other identifying characteristics. See the chart on p. 487 for each mode’s identifying characteristics.

Singing When singing any of the modes: 1. Know which scale serves as the basis for the mode you are singing. Set yourself up in a key using that scale. 2. Know the chromatic alterations that you need to apply to your scale. 3. Repeat your scale with the appropriate alterations.

Assignments for Practice 1. Practice singing all modes in rapid succession from a given pitch. Change the order in which you sing the modes. 2. Improvise using the modes. Figure out how to take advantage of the “altered” scale degree that gives each mode its unique sound. Focus on presenting this scale degree.

Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 11.2.1

PITCH PATTERN 11.2.2

PITCH PATTERN 11.2.3

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 489

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

Melodies MELODY 11.2.1

Allegretto

MELODY 11.2.2

Moderately fast

MELODY 11.2.3

Adagio

489

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 490

490

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

MELODY 11.2.4

Lento

MELODY 11.2.5

Solemnly

MELODY 11.2.6

Cantabile e legato

MELODY 11.2.7

Giocoso

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 491

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

MELODY 11.2.8

With energy

MELODY 11.2.9

Allegro

MELODY 11.2.10

Allegro

491

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 492

492

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

MELODY 11.2.11

Swinging

Fine

D.C. al fine

MELODY 11.2.12

Solemnly

MELODY 11.2.13

Andante con moto

MELODY 11.2.14

Allegretto

sempre legato

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 493

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

MELODY 11.2.15

With intensity

Duets DUET 11.2.1

Slowly, in one

DUET 11.2.2

Andante cantabile

DUET 11.2.3

Gaily and quite fast

light and articulate

493

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 494

494

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

Chorale CHORALE 11.2 Langsam

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 11.2 Mournfully

Mournfully

rit.

rit.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 495

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

495

11.3 Other Scales Facts You Need to Know There are hundreds of ways of arranging the 12-note octave into interesting and exotic-sounding scales. Like modes, most retain a basic major or minor sound and rely on altered or added scale degrees to give them a unique character. Many “exotic” scales have ethnic names. Often these names have little to do with their country of origin. Other scales have descriptive names that can help you to figure out their pitch content. Some of the more common named scales appear below. Note that the chart below represents a fraction of the scale possibilities. Many other “unnamed” scales exist and can be used to create a unique sound in a piece of music. EXAMPLE 11.3.1 Overtone Scale Lydian-Mixolydian Scale (Major with raised 4 and lowered 7)

Major Locrian Scale Arabic Scale (Major with lowered 5, 6, and 7)

Major Phrygian Scale Spanish or Jewish Scale (Major with lowered 2, 6, and 7)

Dorian-Phrygian Scale Javanese Scale (Natural minor with lowered 2 and raised 6)

Gypsy Minor Scale Hungarian Minor Scale (Harmonic minor with raised 4)

Dominant Bebop Scale (Major with added lowered 7)

Notice that the labeling of these scales is not standardized. As a result, it is often better to learn and refer to these scales as alterations of either the major or the minor scale.

Hearing As with all scales, follow these steps for identification: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Listen for tonic. Listen for modality. Does it sound major or minor? Listen for the number of pitches. Listen for the approach to tonic, especially from below. Listen for added or altered scale degrees.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 496

496

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

Singing Know the identifying characteristics of the scale you are going to sing. Establish tonic and the scale’s modality. Find diatonic “waypoints” in your scale. For example, a perfect fifth above the tonic or a major or minor third scale degree are excellent places to check the integrity of your scale. Sing the scale as major or minor with added or altered scale degrees.

Assignments for Practice 1. Practice singing scales and then altering one or more scale degrees. 2. Improvise using a scale before singing a melody. Notice how its unique characteristics affect the sound of the music.

Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 11.3.1

PITCH PATTERN 11.3.2

PITCH PATTERN 11.3.3

Melodies MELODY 11.3.1

Moderato

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 497

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

MELODY 11.3.2

Mässig

MELODY 11.3.3

Doloroso

MELODY 11.3.4

Vif

MELODY 11.3.5

Very slowly

Gently, softly, legato

497

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 498

498

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

MELODY 11.3.6

Expressively

MELODY 11.3.7

Allegro non troppo

fine

D.C. al fine

MELODY 11.3.8

Moderato

piu

piu

diminuendo

MELODY 11.3.9

With intensity

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 499

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

MELODY 11.3.10

Mässig

MELODY 11.3.11

Angrily

simile

MELODY 11.3.12

Grazioso

MELODY 11.3.13

Like a quiet stillness

rall.

499

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 500

500

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

MELODY 11.3.14

Presto

MELODY 11.3.15

With energy

Duets DUET 11.3.1

Agitated

subito

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 501

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

DUET 11.3.2

Relentlessly

DUET 11.3.3

Firmly, with determination

=

501

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 502

502

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

Chorale CHORALE 11.3

Langsam

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 11.3

Allegro

Allegro

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 503

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

503

11.4 Polytonality and Polymodality Facts You Need to Know Polytonality and polymodality occur when two or more elements of a piece of music appear in different keys or modes simultaneously. The elements that occur in different keys or modes are usually separated by timbre, texture, or register. Each separate element typically presents a single key or mode in a very clear way.

Hearing 1. Listen for the separation of elements by register and/or timbre. 2. Listen for the “clash” of sounds between the keys that are used in each separate voice. 3. Listen and write the musical element that you hear most clearly. This may be either melodic or harmonic in nature. 4. Listen for the other musical elements and write them down. 5. Listen for how the separate elements interact. Is it a largely consonant or dissonant interaction? What intervals can you hear between the two voices?

Singing 1. Polytonality and polymodality require that more than one musical voice be sounding at the same time. 2. Focus on the integrity of your musical part. Retain your own sense of tonic, and hear all of your pitches in relation to this tonic. 3. As you perform, listen for the interaction between your part and all other parts. Listen for the consonances or resonances that result from the sounding of the musical lines together. Listen for the integrity of the intervals or chords.

Assignments for Practice With a friend, sing parallel scales starting on different pitches. Be careful to maintain the integrity of both scales.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 504

504

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

Duets DUET 11.4.1

Moderato

DUET 11.4.2

Slowly, darkly

DUET 11.4.3

With brutality

pesante

subito tranquillo

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 505

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

DUET 11.4.4

Stately

DUET 11.4.5

Moderate and unfettered

DUET 11.4.6

Happily, with a hint of silliness

505

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 506

506

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

DUET 11.4.7

Languidly

rit.

DUET 11.4.8

Very slowly

DUET 11.4.9

Andante semplice

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 507

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

Chorale CHORALE 11.4

Mysteriously

Soprano divisi

Tenor divisi

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 11.4

Quickly

Quickly

very light

rall.

507

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 508

508

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

11.5 Music from the Literature EXAMPLE 11.5.1 “Bruyères,” from Preludes pour Piano, Book II

Calme, Doucement expressif

Debussy

EXAMPLE 11.5.2 “Laideronnette, Impératrice des Pagodes,” from La Mère l’Oye m. 105–134

Ravel

Mov't de Marche

très expressi f

EXAMPLE 11.5.3 The Cherry Tree Carol

Gently

Kentucky

EXAMPLE 11.5.4 “Passepied,” from Suite Bergamasque m. 3–10

Debussy

cresc.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 509

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

509

EXAMPLE 11.5.5 Helft mir Gott's Güte preisen J.S. Bach

EXAMPLE 11.5.6 British Folk Song

Andante

EXAMPLE 11.5.7 Serbian Folk Song

Andante

EXAMPLE 11.5.8 “Es ist genug, so nimm, Herr,” from Cantata No. 60

J.S. Bach

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 510

510

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

EXAMPLE 11.5.9 “Pagodes,” from Estampes

m. 33–37

Debussy

Sans lenteur

EXAMPLE 11.5.10 “Christus, der uns selig macht” J.S. Bach

EXAMPLE 11.5.11 Mazurka, Op. 41, No.1 Chopin

Maestoso

EXAMPLE 11.5.12 O Virgo Splendens

Anonymous, fourteenth-century Spain

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 511

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

511

11.6 Non-Western Music from the Literature Folk music from non-Western cultures provides a large body of music that utilizes non-traditional scales. The folk songs below provide a sampling of the diverse sounds and scale structures available to musicians. As with all music that uses non-traditional scales, begin by figuring out the scale and its important characteristics. Sing that scale and get used to its sound. See how that sound helps to tell the musical story in each song. Music from Africa EXAMPLE 11.6.1 Ngoma Kurila (A Lament) ad. lib

Fast

African Song

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

512

Page 512

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

EXAMPLE 11.6.2 Woza (Come) African Song

EXAMPLE 11.6.3 Amampondo (Pondo Man) African Song

Fine

D.S. al Fine

EXAMPLE 11.6.4 Kwaheri

Traditional Kenyan Song 1.

2.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 513

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

Music from Australia EXAMPLE 11.6.5 The Green New Chum

Australian Bush Song

EXAMPLE 11.6.6 Where's Your Licence? Australian Bush Song

EXAMPLE 11.6.7 Farewell to the Ladies of Brisbane

Australian Bush Song

513

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 514

514

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

Music from Japan EXAMPLE 11.6.8

3-part round 1. 2. 3.

Hotaru Koi Traditional Japanese Song

Music from China EXAMPLE 11.6.9 Hua Ku Ka No. 2 (The Flower Drum) Chinese Song

Moderately fast

senza rit.

EXAMPLE 11.6.10 Ch'u T'ou Ko (Farmer's Song)

Chinese Song

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 515

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

515

EXAMPLE 11.6.11 Sa Huo K'ei Lei (What Flow'r Blooms?) Chinese Song

Tempo rubato

Jewish Folk Music EXAMPLE 11.6.12 Die Alte Kashe Jewish Folk Song

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 516

516

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

EXAMPLE 11.6.13 Mi Y'malel

Chanukkah Song

March-like rhythm

Fine

D.C. al Fine

EXAMPLE 11.6.14 Ruchot Hayam Jewish Folk Song 1.

2.

Native American Music EXAMPLE 11.6.15 Haliwa-Saponi Canoe Dance Native American

1.

2.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 517

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

517

EXAMPLE 11.6.16 Song to the Four Directions Native American

Very freely

Slower

EXAMPLE 11.6.17 Basket Dance

Native American

Repeat three times

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 518

518

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

Reflections: Being an Advocate for Music Many music students enter college with a view that music is the vehicle that will provide them with a career, and possibly even fame and fortune. Most of us entered this field at least partly because of the “rush” we felt as an audience clapped for a performance—for our performance. Being a musician, however, is both a privilege and a responsibility. Success in the field of music also requires one to be an effective advocate for one’s art. In order for music to continue to be the vehicle through which we develop our careers, every musician must also “give back” to the field through effective arts advocacy, training the next generation of musicians, and insisting on the continued improvement and development of music as an art. It is only through these actions that we will be able to demonstrate the importance of live and new music as a cornerstone of our culture, build and retain audiences for our craft, and demonstrate the relevance of what we do. If we fail to do these things, then we imperil the future of the very thing that we ask to sustain us. Being an advocate for music involves demonstrating the importance of live and new music in the life of our culture. We do this through demonstrating professionalism and, more importantly, excellence in our craft. We do what we do not only because we love it but also because it is not something that everybody can do. Part of artistry is the goal of inspiring awe on the part of our audience, so that they too can aspire to greatness through our example. Music advocacy also involves promoting new music. Musicians who only perform music from the “standard repertory” risk becoming living museums—a window only into our culture’s past and not fully connected to the intellectual and artistic life of our time. To do this effectively, however, one must insist not only on excellence (there’s that word again) but also on the development of a strong sense of aesthetic discrimination. We are the agents who create, discover, and select the master works of our time. It is, along with training the next generation of musicians, our gift to the future. Finally, music advocacy involves insisting that what we do is important. Music, as all art, has the ability to elevate humankind above the mundane and ordinary. It has the capacity to ask questions and reveal truths that may take science generations to uncover. Musicians must insist that they have a value to society that goes far beyond economics. As you develop your skills and embark on your career, pay attention to how your attitude toward and relationship with music is likely to change. Whereas many music students come to college thinking that music will serve them, the most successful ones leave considering how they can serve the art.

11.7 Dictation Materials I. Scale Identification

Your teacher will play melodies based on exotic scales. For each, begin by determining the number of notes that comprise the scale. Next, determine its modality (major or minor). After that, listen for the approach to tonic from below—it will most commonly be a leading tone (minor second), subtonic (major second), or minor third. Next, listen for altered scale degrees. Finally, if the scale used in the melody has a name, provide it. Otherwise, create a name that describes what you hear (for example, a harmonic minor scale with a raised fourth scale degree).

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 519

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

519

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE 11.1 No. of Notes

Modality

Approach to Tonic

Altered Scale Degrees

Scale Name

Modality

Approach to Tonic

Altered Scale Degrees

Scale Name

Modality

Approach to Tonic

Altered Scale Degrees

Scale Name

TABLE 11.2 No. of Notes

TABLE 11.3 No. of Notes

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 520

520

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

TABLE 11.4 No. of Notes

Modality

Approach to Tonic

Altered Scale Degrees

Scale Name

Modality

Approach to Tonic

Altered Scale Degrees

Scale Name

TABLE 11.5 No. of Notes

II. Melodic and Rhythmic Dictation

Your teacher will play a short melody or rhythm. Notate it on the staves below. Remember to write the rhythm first. Next try to determine what scale is being used. Remember to add in the appropriate accidentals to stay in the scale. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 521

Twentieth-century Material based on Tonal Models

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

521

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 522

Chapter 12

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

12.1 Whole-tone, Octatonic, and other Non-Tonal Scales Facts You Need to Know A whole-tone scale is a six-note scale consisting entirely of whole steps. EXAMPLE 12.1.1

1 0

2 2

3 4

4 6

5 8

6 t

1 0

An octatonic scale is an eight-note scale that alternates whole steps and half steps. Octatonic scales can begin with a half step (0–1 octatonic) or a whole step (0–2 octatonic). EXAMPLE 12.1.2

1 0

2 1

3 3

4 4

5 6

6 7

7 9

8 e

1 0

1 0

2 2

3 3

4 5

5 6

6 8

7 9

8 t

1 0

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 523

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

523

(Because both scales are constructed to avoid tonicizing any particular pitch, note that the top number refers to the scale degree of each pitch, while the bottom number indicates the number of semitones above the starting pitch—a numbering system called integer notation. Integer notation will be explained more fully in Chapter 12, Section 2, Atonality.)

Hearing Because these scales symmetrically divide the octave, there is no built-in drive towards any particular pitch as being tonic. As a result, these scales have an indeterminate sound that is often described as “floaty,” “ethereal,” or “dream-like.” As with all scales, begin by counting pitches, listening for tonal center and modality. If no tonal center is apparent, listen for the presence or absence of minor seconds.

Singing Begin singing both scales by dividing them into three-note segments. Each of these segments individually suggests a recognizable tonal structure: Whole-tone scale: first three pitches of a major scale 0–2 octatonic scale: first three pitches of a minor scale 0–1 octatonic scale: scale degrees 3–4–5 in the major mode EXAMPLE 12.1.3

Whole Tone

F

Do 1

Re 2

0-1 Octatonic

Mi 3

D

Mi 3

Fa 4

0-2 Octatonic

Sol 5

f

Do 1

Re 2

Me 3

When you reach the end of each three-note segment, treat the last pitch as the starting point for the next three-note segment. Repeat until you reach the octave. EXAMPLE 12.1.4 Whole Tone

1 2 3 0 2 4 0-1 Octatonic

1 0

2 1

3 3

1 0

2 2

3 4

1 0

2 2

3 4

1 0

2 1

3 3

1 0

2 1

3 3

1 0

2 1

3 3

1 0

2 2

3 3

1 0

2 2

3 3

1 0

2 2

3 3

0-2 Octatonic

1 0

2 2

3 3

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 524

524

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

Once you feel comfortable singing the three-note segments individually, try singing the scale without pausing to “reset” your tonal center.

Assignments for Practice Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 12.1.1

PITCH PATTERN 12.1.2

PITCH PATTERN 12.1.3

Melodies MELODY 12.1.1

Andante

MELODY 12.1.2

Rasch

subito

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 525

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

MELODY 12.1.3

Very slowly

MELODY 12.1.4

With an air of mystery

rit.

MELODY 12.1.5

Fast, with energy

MELODY 12.1.6

Gently

525

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 526

526

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

MELODY 12.1.7

Animato

MELODY 12.1.8

Moderato

MELODY 12.1.9

Deliberately

MELODY 12.1.10

Quickly

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 527

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

527

MELODY 12.1.11

Giocoso

MELODY 12.1.12

Moderato

MELODY 12.1.13

With motion and energy

Improvise these measures.

MELODY 12.1.14

Moderato

=

=

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 528

528

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

MELODY 12.1.15

Behaglich

Duets DUET 12.1.1

Vif

DUET 12.1.2

Mysteriously

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 529

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

DUET 12.1.3

As slowly as possible

Chorale CHORALE 12.1

Morbidly, slowly

529

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 530

530

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 12.1

Andante

Andante

legato

12.2 Atonality Facts You Need to Know Atonal music seeks to avoid establishing a hierarchy of pitches. The syllable system you have used up to now has been based in tonal relationships. When music purposefully avoids establishing a tonal center, these labels become meaningless. A different labeling system is commonly used to show relationships in atonal music. This system labels the lowest pitch in a structure as “0.” Other pitches are labeled based on the number of semitones between it and the lowest pitch. The table below shows the integer equivalent of the common interval names: Perfect Unison Minor Second Major Second Minor Third Major Third Perfect Fourth

0 1 2 3 4 5

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 531

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

Tritone Perfect Fifth Minor Sixth Major Sixth Minor Seventh Major Seventh Perfect Octave

531

6 7 8 9 10 11 12

There are three common techniques for hearing and singing atonal music. You should learn and practice all three. While you will probably rely more on one than the others, you will most likely need to employ a combination of the three to effectively hear and sing atonal music.

Method 1: Sing Intervals When singing tonal music, you were specifically instructed to sing scale degrees instead of intervals. Since atonal music is constructed using a different set of “rules,” and, as a result of continuing to practice your intervals, you either have achieved (or will achieve) a high level of proficiency singing and recognizing intervals, you may choose to figure out parts of melodies by dealing exclusively with their interval content. Note that most professional musicians who regularly perform atonal music state that this is the method they use least frequently.

Method 2: Find Small Intervals Even in the most disjunct and angular atonal melodies, some pitches will end up repeating others or being immediately next to others. Find these relationships and use them to retain the integrity of pitch in the melody.

Method 3: Rapidly Shifting Tonic From the beginning, the method this textbook employs has been based on the idea that people hear tonally. If this is true, atonal music presents a serious problem. Some musicians deal with this by figuring out how to hear atonal music in short tonal segments that rapidly shift. This method requires thorough study of the score and planning of one’s tonal shifts.

Preliminary Melodies The following melodies are specifically designed to practice Method 2, finding small intervals above. Each is constructed from two or more chromatic lines that are intertwined. Begin by finding and singing the notes of one line at a time, leaving space (rest) for the pitches in the other melodic line(s). Once you are comfortable with each line individually, then try singing them together, keeping track of how each line moves individually. Listen for “friendly” intervals (such as perfect octaves, fourths, or fifths) between the lines that can help you determine whether you are maintaining the integrity of the pitches.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 532

532

PRELIMINARY MELODY 12.2.1

PRELIMINARY MELODY 12.2.2

PRELIMINARY MELODY 12.2.3

PRELIMINARY MELODY 12.2.4

PRELIMINARY MELODY 12.2.5

PRELIMINARY MELODY 12.2.6

PRELIMINARY MELODY 12.2.7

PRELIMINARY MELODY 12.2.8

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 533

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 12.2.1

PITCH PATTERN 12.2.2

PITCH PATTERN 12.2.3

Melodies MELODY 12.2.1

Espressivo

MELODY 12.2.2

Allegro

533

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 534

534

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

MELODY 12.2.3

Tenderly

MELODY 12.2.4

With intensity

MELODY 12.2.5

Solemnly

MELODY 12.2.6

Allegro non troppo

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 535

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

MELODY 12.2.7

Playfully

MELODY 12.2.8

Langsam

MELODY 12.2.9

Langsam

MELODY 12.2.10

Dramatically

535

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

536

Page 536

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

Duets DUET 12.2.1

Adagio

DUET 12.2.2

Vif

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 537

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

DUET 12.2.3

Gedehnt

Chorale CHORALE 12.2

Driving forward

537

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 538

538

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 12.2

Slowly, very heavy

Slowly, very heavy

12.3 Atonal Trichords and Manipulating Atonal Sets Facts You Need to Know One way of organizing and explaining musical structures is through the use of set theory. Set theory, originally developed by and borrowed from the field of mathematics, is based on the idea that it is easier to make meaningful descriptions of and comparisons between things if they are placed into logical, small groups. When applied to music, set theory usually involves the placing of pitches into these groups. Comparing the properties of these groups can reveal whether certain combinations of pitches or intervals (the spaces between the pitches) appear with regularity or in a pattern. One easy group of musical sets to memorize and manipulate are trichords. There are only twelve possible combinations of intervals formed when three unique pitches are grouped together in a set. The chart below describes these twelve sets. Each box contains: 1. The Forte number: where this set exists in a numbering system developed by the noted music theorist Allen Forte. 2. The prime form of the set: the most compact statement of the three pitches with the smallest intervals appearing closer toward the lowest pitch, which is labeled as “0.”

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 539

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

539

3. The inverted form of the set: the most compact statement of the three pitches with the smallest intervals appearing closer toward the highest pitch. Notice that sets in the top row of the chart do not have inverted forms. 4. The interval content of the set. You should memorize all information in this chart: 3–1 012 Two minor seconds One major second

3–6 024 Two major seconds One major third

3–10 036 Two minor thirds One tritone

3–2 013 023 One minor second One major second One minor third

3–7 025 035 One major second One minor third One perfect fourth

3–11 037 047 One minor third One major third One perfect fifth

3–3 014 034 One minor second One minor third One major third

3–8 026 046 One major second One major third One tritone

3–4 015 045 One minor second One major third One perfect fourth

3–9 027 057 One major second One perfect fourth One perfect fifth

3–12 048 Two major thirds One minor sixth

3–5 016 056 One minor second One perfect fourth One tritone

Musical sets are commonly manipulated in a few ways. Notice that none of these change the interval content of the set. Even though the pitches may be different, the set, and its characteristic sound, remains the same.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

540

Page 540

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

1. Reordering: the exact same pitches appear in a different order. (For the six possible orderings of trichords, see Section 1.10, Major Triads in Root Position.) EXAMPLE 12.3.1

2. Pitch displacement: one or more of the pitches are displaced by an octave, resulting in a different musical contour. EXAMPLE 12.3.2

3. Transposition: all of the pitches are moved by the same interval. EXAMPLE 12.3.3

4. Inversion: the intervals of the set are placed in reverse order. EXAMPLE 12.3.4

+1 +5

+5 +1

Notice that multiple operations may be performed on a set at the same time.

Hearing Trichords 1. To identify trichords, begin by reordering the pitches from low to high, in your head if necessary. 2. Determine the interval formed by the boundary pitches of the set (the lowest and highest). 3. Next, listen for the placement of the interior pitch. Determine the interval either above the lower or below the higher boundary pitch. Use your knowledge of intervals (and math!) to determine the remaining interval.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 541

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46

541

4. Use your knowledge of the interval content of each trichord (from the chart above) to determine the correct trichord.

Set-based Melodies 1. Begin as you would any melodic dictation: figure out the rhythm and starting pitch. 2. Listen for the first statement of the set—it will usually appear prominently at the beginning of the piece. 3. Listen for identifying characteristics of the set. For example, if the set utilizes a semitone, listen specifically for instances of that semitone throughout the melody. Mark them. 4. Use your techniques for hearing atonal melodies (see Chapter 12, Section 2, Atonality) to fill in the remaining pitches.

Singing Trichords 1. Begin by singing the boundary pitches of the set. 2. Place the remaining pitch above the lower boundary pitch (if in prime form) or below the upper boundary pitch (if in inverted form). 3. Perform other operations such as reordering or displacement.

Set-based Melodies Use your techniques for singing atonal melodies described in Section 12.2. Be aware of identifying characteristics of the set (such as an identifying interval) that you can use to maintain the integrity of the melody.

Assignments for Practice Pitch Patterns PITCH PATTERN 12.3.1

PITCH PATTERN 12.3.2

PITCH PATTERN 12.3.3

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 542

542

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

Melodies MELODY 12.3.1

Allegro

MELODY 12.3.2

Not too fast

MELODY 12.3.3

Andante

subito

MELODY 12.3.4

Whimsically

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 543

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

MELODY 12.3.5

Allegro

MELODY 12.3.6

Feroce

rit.

MELODY 12.3.7

Moderato

MELODY 12.3.8

Schnell

MELODY 12.3.9

Tango

543

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 544

544

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

MELODY 12.3.10

Vivace (In 1)

molto

MELODY 12.3.11

Piu Allegro

MELODY 12.3.12

Vivace

MELODY 12.3.13

Allegro

MELODY 12.3.14

Langsam

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 545

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

MELODY 12.3.15

Langsam

detached

Duets DUET 12.3.1

Resolutely

DUET 12.3.2

Grave

DUET 12.3.3

Andante grazioso

545

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 546

546

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

Chorale CHORALE 12.3

Serenely

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 12.3

Tempo de Habenara

Tempo de Habenara

rit.

rit.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 547

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

547

12.4 Larger Atonal Sets and Serial Music Facts You Need to Know Set-based atonal music can utilize groups of notes of any size. The techniques for organizing this music and manipulating these sets remain the same. In atonal music, the ordering of the pitches in the set is not important to the organization of the music. In serial music, the ordering is essential. All the pitches in the set must appear before the set can repeat in either its original or a modified form. The most common form of serial music involves cycling through all twelve chromatic pitches. These organizational schemes do not significantly impact upon the sound of the music. You can still rely on the techniques you have already learned for singing and hearing atonal music.

Hearing Use the same techniques for hearing atonal music that you learned earlier in this chapter.

Singing Use the same techniques for singing atonal music that you learned earlier in this chapter.

Assignments for Practice Melodies MELODY 12.4.1

Moderately fast

MELODY 12.4.2

Lebhaft

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 548

548

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

MELODY 12.4.3

Maestoso

piu

MELODY 12.4.4

Allegro non troppo

MELODY 12.4.5

Agitato

MELODY 12.4.6

Waltz

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 549

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

MELODY 12.4.7

Andante cantabile

MELODY 12.4.8

Modéré

MELODY 12.4.9

Langsam

Pesante

MELODY 12.4.10

Happily

549

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 550

550

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

MELODY 12.4.11

Moderato

MELODY 12.4.12

Grave

MELODY 12.4.13

Allegro ma non troppo

molto

MELODY 12.4.14

Adagio e cantabile

piu

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 551

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

MELODY 12.4.15

Allegro leggiero

tranquillo

Duets DUET 12.4.1

Moderately fast

DUET 12.4.2

March tempo

551

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 552

552

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

DUET 12.4.3

Fast

molto ritardando

Chorale CHORALE 12.4

Moderately fast

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 553

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

553

Self-Accompanied Melody SELF-ACCOMPANIED MELODY 12.4

Slowly and mysteriously

Slowly and mysteriously

legato

12.5 Music from the Literature EXAMPLE 12.5.1 "Free Variations," from Mikrokosmos, No. 140 Bartok

Molto più calmo, lugubre

, intenso

dim. -

-

-

-

© 1940 by Hawkes & Son (London) Ltd. Reprinted by permission of Boosey & Hawkes, Inc.

-

-

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 554

554

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

EXAMPLE 12.5.2 The Cage

Charles Ives

© 1955 by Peer International Corporation, copyright renewed. This arrangement © 2009 by Peer International Corporation, International copyright secured. All rights reserved. EXAMPLE 12.5.3 "Whole Tone Scale," from Mikrokosmos No. 136 m. 1–12, left hand

Andante

Bartok

dolce

© 1940 by Hawkes & Son (London) Ltd. Reprinted by permission of Boosey & Hawkes, Inc.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 555

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

555

EXAMPLE 12.5.4 "Nacht," from Seven Early Songs (1907) Alban Berg

Sehr langsam

poco a poco cresc.

mezza voce

EXAMPLE 12.5.5 "Sleep," from Six Elizabethan Songs Dominick Argento

Lentamente

pochino cresc.

dimin.

© 1970 by Boosey & Hawkes, Inc. Reprinted by permission.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 556

556

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

EXAMPLE 12.5.6 From Piano Variations (1930)

m. 12–20

Grave

Aaron Copland

molto espressivo

© 1932 by The Aaron Copland Fund for Music, Inc. Copyright renewed, Boosey & Hawkes, Inc., Sole licensee. Reprinted by permission EXAMPLE 12.5.7 "Voiles," from Préludes pour Piano, Book I m. 10–21

Debussy

Modéré

très doux

EXAMPLE 12.5.8 From La Lugubre Gondola, II m. 23–32

Andante mesto, non troppo lento recitando

sempre legato

Liszt

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 557

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

557

EXAMPLE 12.5.9 "Tot," from Three Songs, Op. 48

Etwas langsam

Arnold Schoenberg

© 1952 by Bomart Music Publications, Inc.; assigned 1955 to Boelke-Bomart, Inc. Revised edition © 1979 by Boelke-Bomart, Inc. Used by permission. EXAMPLE 12.5.10 Prelude 4, from Five Preludes, Op. 15

Lent, vague, indécis

pochiss.

poco a poco cresc.

Alexander Scriabin

dim.

cresc. accel .

dim.

rit.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 558

558

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

EXAMPLE 12.5.11 “Thema,” from Variations for Orchestra, Op. 31, Cello line

m. 34–50

Molto moderato

Arnold Schoenberg

zart

Used by permission of Belmont Music Publishers. EXAMPLE 12.5.12 “Galop,” from Souvenirs, Op. 28

A tempo, but easy going

Samuel Barber

© 1954 (renewed) by G. Schirmer, Inc. (ASCAP) International copyright secured. All rights reserved. Used by permission.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 559

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

559

Reflections: A Life of Solfège So you’re just about to finish your last aural skills test. No more stressing out over identifying intervals or chords. No more writing down or figuring out melodies. Think back on where you were two years ago when you first started taking your aural skills courses. Do you remember how there were a lot of things that you could tell sounded “right” or “wrong,” but you couldn’t say why? Do you remember how you discovered that feeling of incompleteness when a phrase ended on scale degree two instead of one? Do you remember your first awkward attempts at improvising tonic harmony? Take a look back at the melodies and chapters in the first units of this book. Those chapters almost certainly look a lot easier now. You may not even have stopped to realize it, but you probably don’t hear music the same way that you did when you first started aural skills two years ago. You have certainly come a long way! Let’s consider how your ear got to where it is today. Basic concepts were laid down, and then each new structure was related to those basic concepts. Each time you undoubtedly had to practice, but as the individual musical topics got more complex, the things that you had already learned probably seemed to become easier. Some of this newer material could sure use some extra time to sink in, so it’s too bad that this class is over. Or is it? You became good at solfège through practice. If you’re like most people, you probably feel that you could become even better with more practice. You’ve probably found yourself starting to apply some of the things you have learned in this class to practice on your instrument or learning music for a solo recital or ensemble performance. The truth is, solfège is one of the basic sustaining skills of every professional musician. The strength of your ear and your musical mind is the basis for your career, and it only stays strong (or gets stronger) through continued daily practice. So, although your aural skills class might be over, your time practicing and improving your aural skills certainly isn’t. The big difference is that now you are on your own. As you encounter musical problems in your career, think back on the skills and approaches you used in this class. Practice adapting them to your current situation. Music acts like a language in many ways. One cannot achieve or maintain fluency in a language without regularly speaking and interpreting it. The same is true for music. Also, the characteristic that separates the successful professional musician from the amateur is one’s sensitivity to sound. This is a skill that can never be overly developed, and increasing one’s sensitivity to what he or she hears also increases one’s enjoyment of music. Every performance has the opportunity to be a completely surprising and transformational experience. So keep practicing, work to be a better musician today than you were yesterday, and remember to always seek out the joy of immersing oneself in music.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 560

560

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

12.6 Dictation Materials I. Interval Identification

Identify each interval you hear using integers instead of traditional names. Be sure to use the plus or minus sign to indicate direction. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ 9. ____ 10. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ 9. ____ 10. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ 9. ____ 10. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ 9. ____ 10. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ 9. ____ 10. ____ II. Trichord Identification

You will hear several three-note sets (trichords). Begin by determining the interval content of the set. Provide either the prime form of the set or its Forte number, as requested by your teacher. If the set is inverted, place a letter “I” after your answer. Beware of set reorderings and pitch displacements! Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ 9. ____ 10. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ 9. ____ 10. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ 9. ____ 10. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ 9. ____ 10. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ 9. ____ 10. ____

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 561

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

561

III. Set Relationships

You will hear several pairs of sets. Determine if each pair is related (the same prime form or Forte number) and, if so, how they are related. Possible answers are: T—Related by transposition I—Related by inversion X—No relationship; the two sets have different prime forms

D—Related by pitch displacement R—Related by reordering

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ 9. ____ 10. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ 9. ____ 10. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ 9. ____ 10. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ 9. ____ 10. ____ Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. ____ 2. ____ 3. ____ 4. ____ 5. ____ 6. ____ 7. ____ 8. ____ 9. ____ 10. ____ IV. Melodic and Rhythmic Dictation

Your teacher will play a short melody or rhythm. Notate it on the staves below. Remember to write the rhythm first. Listen specifically for pitches that return or are near to each other (pitch affinity), recurring intervals, short fragments of tonality, and “friendly” intervals. Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 562

562

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Twentieth-century Material based on Non-Tonal Models

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 563

Appendix A: Glossary of Musical Terms

a tempo (It.) return to the previous tempo abschwellen (Ger.) getting softer accelerando (accel.) (It.) gradually getting faster adagietto (It.) slightly faster than adagio; with ease adagio (It.) slowly, with ease affretando (It.) hurrying agitato (It.) agitated alla (It.) in, in the style of . . . allargando (It.) growing slower allegretto (It.) moderately fast allegro (It.) fast allegro ma non troppo (It.) fast, but not too fast andante (It.) moderately slow, walking tempo andantino (It.) moderately slow animato (It.) lively, with spirit animé (Fr.) animated, lively ardent (Fr.), ardente (It.) fiery assai (It.) very assez (Fr.) rather, enough aufhalter (Ger.) slowing down (see also ritard) ausdruck (Ger.) with heartfelt expression avec (Fr.) with behaglich (Ger.) easily belebt (Ger.) animated, brisk bene (It.) well (ben marcato—well marked) bewegt (Ger.) moved, agitated bewegter (Ger.) getting faster breit (Ger.) broad, stately calando (It.) “decreasing,” gradually becoming softer calcando (It.) “pressing,” hastening the tempo cantabile (It.) in a singing style cèdez (Fr.) go slower chaleur (Fr.) warmth comodo (It.) easy, leisurely, at a convenient pace con (It.) with

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 564

564

Appendix A: Glossary of Musical Terms

con brio (It.) “with noise,” spiritedly con caloroso (It.) with warmth con forza (It.) with force, energy con fuoco (It.) with fire con moto (It.) with motion crescendo (cresc.) (It.) gradually growing louder decrescendo (decresc.) (It.) gradually growing softer deficiendo (It.) dying away diminuendo (dim.) (It.) gradually growing softer dolce (It.) sweetly and softly dolente (It.) doleful, plaintive, sad, sorrowful douce(ment), doux (Fr.) sweetly einfach (Ger.) with simplicity en dehors (Fr.) to bring out (a melody or voice) espressivo (espr.) (It.) with expression etwas (Ger.) rather, somewhat facile (Fr.) easily feuerig, mit feuer (Ger.) fiery gedehnt (Ger.) sustained, prolonged, slow, stately gefällig (Ger.) pleasing, graceful gemächlich (Ger.) easy, comfortably gemessen (Ger.) held back, sustained geschwindt (Ger.) swiftly, rapidly getragen (Ger.) sustained giocoso (It.) playfully, merrily grave (It.) heavy, slow, ponderous in movement grazioso (It.) gracefully, elegantly immer (Ger.) always l’istesso tempo (It.) the same tempo; return to tempo langsam (Ger.) slowly largamente (It.) “largely,” broadly, characterized by a sustained sound larghetto (It.) slowly, but somewhat faster than largo largo (It.) slowly, broad lebhaft (Ger.) animated, lively legato (It.) smoothly and connected léger (Fr.) light leggiero, leggero (It.) light, airy leicht (Ger.) light, brisk lente (Fr.) slowly lento (It.) slowly

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 565

Appendix A: Glossary of Musical Terms

lourd (Fr.) heavy luftig (Ger.) lightly maestoso (It.) majestically, dignified marcato (It.) “marked,” with distinctness and emphasis mässig (Ger.) moderately meno (It.) less; not so . . . meno mosso (It.) less motion misterioso (It.) mysteriously mit (Ger.) with mit wärme (Ger.) with warmth moderato (It.) moderately modéré (Fr.) moderately molto (It.) very, much morendo (It.) dying away nicht (Ger.) not nicht zu schnell (Ger.) not too fast non (It., Fr.) not ohne (Ger.) without pensieroso (It.) pensive, thoughtfully pesante (It.) heavy peu, peu à peu (Fr.) little; little by little più (It.) more più mosso (It.) more motion, becoming faster plus (Fr.) more poco, poco a poco (It.) little; little by little presses (Fr.) accelerate, growing gradually faster prestissimo (It.) very fast presto (It.) very fast quasi (It.) as if; nearly quelque peu (Fr.) somewhat rallentando (rall.) (It.) growing slower and slower rasch (Ger.) fast, rapid, swift retenu (Fr.) holding back ritard, ritardando (rit.) (It.) growing slower and slower ritenuto (It.) held back; at a slower rate of speed rubato (It.) “robbed,” lengthening certain notes while shortening others ruhig (Ger.) calmly sans (Fr.) without scherzando (It.) lightheartedly, jestingly; as a tempo, fast

565

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

566

13:34

Page 566

Appendix A: Glossary of Musical Terms

schnell (Ger.) fast, quick, rapid schneller (Ger.) getting faster sehr (Ger.) very semplice (It.) with simplicity sempre (It.) always senza (It.) without slentando (It.) growing slower smorzando (It.) dying away sostenuto (It.) sustained, often implying a broadening of the tempo soutenu (Fr.) held, sustained stretto (It.) pressed, hurried stringendo (It.) hastening, accelerating, often with a crescendo subito (It.) suddenly süss (Ger.) sweetly tempo primo (It.) play at the original tempo toujours (Fr.) always tranquillo (It.) tranquilly traurig (Ger.) sadly très (Fr.) very vershwindend (Ger.) vanishing, dying away viel (Ger.) much, great vif (Fr.) lively vite (Fr.) fast vivace (It.) lively, animated, brisk vivo (It.) lively, spirited wenig (Ger.) little wuchtig (Ger.) weighty, ponderously, with emphasis zart(lich) (Ger.) tenderly ziemlich (Ger.) somewhat, rather züruckhaltend (Ger.) holding back, gradually becoming slower

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 567

Appendix B: Syllable Systems

Syllable systems have been a standard component of musical instruction since the beginnings of solfège study in seventeenth-century Italy. The consistent use of a syllable system seeks to accomplish one or more of the following goals: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Recognition of notes and harmonic structures Understanding of musical relationships within a key Practice in observing multiple aspects of a musical sound Providing a musical sound on which to sing each pitch

Each syllable system emphasizes one or two of these characteristics over the others. As such, the system you will be asked to use will be determined by the characteristics that your teacher values the most from the list above. All syllable systems have merit and can be used effectively. It is important that you spend time learning and practicing the system that you are required to use. Common Syllable Systems Fixed-Do

The fixed-do syllable system uses traditional French or Italian names for pitches and emphasizes musical sound and mastery of note reading and harmonic structures. Students must name the pitches they sing, albeit in a different language than they would use in normal conversation. As such, the ability to competently read all of the standard clefs is emphasized. Students must also know the notes that go into each structure (in every key) in order to sing the correct syllables. This reinforces the spelling of chords, scales, and other structures taught through harmony. In addition, the use of French or Italian pitch names provides syllables on which it is easier to make musical sounds. In most English-language fixed-do systems, chromatic alterations on pitches are ignored, so all pitches with the same letter name (D-flat, D-natural, etc.) would receive the same syllable. TABLE B.1 Pitch

Syllable

Pitch

Syllable

C, C-sharp, C-flat D, D-sharp, D-flat E, etc. F

Do Re Mi Fa

G A B

Sol La Si

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 568

568

Appendix B: Syllable Systems

Perhaps most importantly, a fixed-do system teaches sensitivity to sound. Students who learn solfège using this system often report that over time, they develop a sense of the uniqueness of discrete pitches, chords in particular keys, and even the individual keys themselves sound. As such, fixed-do solfège seeks to instill a very strong and precise sense of relative pitch. Letter Names

A variation of the fixed-do system is the use of English letter names. Like traditional fixed-do solfège syllables, reading of pitches and spelling of harmonic structures are reinforced. Many teachers feel that the English letters have a less musical sound than the traditional solfège syllables, but they allow the student to sing in his or her “native” language. When this system is used, alterations to pitches are often omitted, just as in fixed-do solmization. Therefore, G-flat, G-natural, and G-sharp would all be sung as simply “G.” Moveable-Do

In any moveable-do system, a solmization syllable replaces the scale degree number of the indicated pitch. Therefore, scale degree 1 in any major or minor key is typically replaced with the syllable Doh. Chromatically altered pitches are accommodated in this system by altering the vowel sound of the diatonic syllable. A list of the complete system with chromatic alterations appears below: TABLE B.2 “Flatted” notes

“Natural” notes

“Sharped” notes

Scale degree

Syllable

Scale degree

Syllable

Scale degree

Syllable

b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7

— Ra Me — Se Le Te

n1 n2 n3 n4 n5 n6 n7

Do Re Mi Fa Sol La Ti

#

Di Ri — Fi Si Li —

1 2 # 3 # 4 # 5 # 6 # 7 #

Thus, a major and a natural minor scale (in any key) side by side would have the following syllable sequences: TABLE B.3 Scale degree Scale Major Natural Minor

1 Do Do

2 Re Re

3 Mi Me

4 Fa Fa

5 Sol Sol

6 La Le

7 Ti Te

1 Do Do

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 569

Appendix B: Syllable Systems

569

Moveable-do systems emphasize relationships within a key and as such are extremely effective at building a very strong sense of tonal direction and function. A Do-minor system places an emphasis on the parallel relationship between a major key and a minor key starting on the same tonic pitch. La-Minor Moveable-Do

A variant of the system above is a La-minor moveable-do system. In this system, major key syllables are identical to those used in Do-minor moveable-do. In minor keys, however, the tonic pitch receives the syllable La. This system emphasizes the relative instead of the parallel relationship between major and minor keys, as well as the consistency of syllable sounds (no syllable sounds have to be altered to sing a natural minor scale). Thus, the major and minor scales placed next to each other would have the following syllable sequences: TABLE B.4 Scale degree Scale Major Natural minor (La-minor)

1 Do La

2 Re Ti

3 Mi Do

4 Fa Re

5 Sol Mi

6 La Fa

7 Ti Sol

1 Do La

The advantage of a La-minor moveable-do system is in the ease of dealing with chromatically altered pitches, such as scale degrees 6 and 7 in the melodic minor scale. All raised pitches will share the same vowel sound (“i” pronounced “ee” as in “Fi–Si–La”). Numbers

Like letter names, English scale degree numbers may be used instead of solfège syllables. These make a more direct connection between sung pitches and scale degree function, but many teachers feel they have a less musical sound and they can add to confusion when harmonic structures labeled with numbers are used (teachers tend to say things like “Sing 3, 5, and 1 for a I chord in 6–3 position!”). The syllable for scale degree 7 is often shortened to “sev” for ease of singing. Which System is Best?

No single system yet developed accomplishes all four goals outlined above. As a result, most effective solfège classes utilize a combination of systems so that the best aspects of each may be emphasized, depending on the pedagogical need. For example, a class that uses fixed-do will often use scale degree numbers simultaneously to strengthen the students’ sense of harmonic function within a key. Many moveable-do classes will use letter names when teaching clef-reading. Note that most combinations mix solfège syllables with English names so that potential confusion between systems is minimized. Many variations on these systems are used in schools of music across the country. Usually these variants serve to enhance one of the four goals stated above. Whatever system is used, it is important to emphasize consistency, accuracy, and musicality, and to keep the goal of using syllables in mind.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 570

Appendix C: Using Your Voice

Proper singing consists of three elements: 1. Posture 2. Breathing 3. Vocalization Posture. When water flows through a pipe, it moves fastest and with the least resistance when its path is straight and the pipe is secured to a stable base. Think of your body as a pipe through which musical energy flows. It flows on the breath, and you need to make a straight, unimpeded, and secure path for it. This is accomplished through using good posture. At first, when you are building the habit of standing with good posture, methodically go through the following checklist that takes you from the floor or seat to your head. Check that . . . 1. Your feet are on the floor and that your body weight is evenly distributed but leaning just slightly forward, toward the balls of your feet. Make sure your knees are not locked. If seated, make sure your legs are bent at a comfortable angle and your feet are resting comfortably on the floor. 2. Your body is centered above your hips. 3. Your back is comfortably straight, your shoulders are relaxed but not sagging, and your arms are hanging comfortably but not pulling your shoulders down. 4. Your head is centered over your neck, your eyes are looking straight ahead, and your chin is at a level position. Breathing. Effective singing starts with effective deep breathing. When inhaling, begin by opening your mouth (we take in air more efficiently through the mouth instead of the nose) and relaxing your oral cavity and throat so that they feel relaxed and open. Think of expanding your rib cage upward and outward and relaxing your abdominal muscles so that your diaphragm (a muscle between your chest cavity and abdominal organs) descends. In essence, you are, in a very relaxed way, expanding your chest cavity, which draws air into your lungs. Relaxation is key: keep your shoulders and arms hanging and relaxed. When exhaling, keep your oral cavity in its open, and relaxed state. Begin to contract your chest cavity by raising the diaphragm and bringing the chest down and in. Let the air flow naturally through your relaxed throat and mouth and out of your body. Remember that musical phrasing happens on the air stream. As a result, try to have the intensity of your exhalation match the musical contour of the phrase you are singing. Also, be aware of exhaling enough air so that you can follow it with a deep inhalation that brings in fresh air to replace it. Finally, allow yourself enough time to take a relaxed, deep, and effective breath before the next musical phrase, and make sure that you think of this breath as a part of the musical fabric. Make the use of air and breath as musical as

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 571

Appendix C: Using Your Voice

571

you can so that it will support the pitches, dynamics, articulation, etc. Think of the breath as part of the music, not as something that interrupts or happens between moments of music. To feel if you are breathing correctly, lie down on your back and notice how you breathe. When you stand up again, try to replicate that same feel. Wind instrumentalists should notice that the breathing process feels very similar to the one you use for playing your instrument. Vocalization. A good way to begin to vocalize is to hum. When humming, start with a good breath. Try to make your mouth cavity a large but comfortable size by lowering your tongue and lifting the back of your throat (the soft palate). For most people, the sound will be very muffled and feel as though it is being created near the bottom of the throat. Imagine moving that sound forward in your mouth to your teeth. As you start to imagine the sound moving, you should start to feel a tickling sensation in your nose. As the sound approaches the teeth and lips, that tickling sensation should strengthen. This sensation is an indication that you are producing sound correctly. Listen for the steadiness of the pitch. Even though your sound is being created by the vocal cords, do not try to control the pitch and steadiness of the sound by tightening your throat. Instead, try to relax the throat and control the volume and steadiness of the sound by controlling your exhalation. Once your pitch is steady and established, open your mouth to create the syllable “ma.” When you open your mouth, be very aware that the things you did to create the hum do not change. Is your air flowing steadily? Does it feel as if the note is being produced up near your teeth instead of in your throat? Is the pitch steady? Energizing the muscles in your face and eyes helps to create a more interesting sound. One way to do this is to smile while you sing. Especially for beginning singers, you need not sing loudly. Have your first sounds be of a moderate volume, and then practice making your sound softer without changing pitch or noticeably reducing the amount of air you use. As you begin, it will be easier to tune and blend these softer sounds. After you have learned to control these, then begin to push your dynamic range toward louder sounds. Good singers learn to recognize and manipulate many little details about their breath control, oral cavity, and mental approach to consistently produce the best sound. If you are a vocalist, practice your singing technique in your solfège exercises. If you are an instrumentalist, practice the techniques detailed above and challenge yourself to make as beautiful and musical a sound as you can.

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 572

Index of Musical Examples

Anonymous, fourteenth-century Spain O Virgo Splendens Argento, Dominick “Sleep,” from Six Elizabethan Songs Bach, J.S. An Wasserflussen Babylon, BWV 653 Chorale, from Cantata No. 140, BWV 140 “Christus, der uns selig macht,” BWV 620 “Es ist genug, so nimm, Herr,” from Cantata No. 60, BWV 60 “Fugue No. 4 in C-sharp Minor,” from The Well-Tempered Clavier, I, BWV 849 “Fugue in E-flat Major,” from The Well-Tempered Clavier, I, BWV 852 Helft mir Gott’s Güte preisen, BWV 613 “Jesu Leiden, Pein und Tod,” from the St. John Passion, BWV 245 Rondeau, from Partita in C Minor, BWV 826 “Prelude No. 9 in E Major,” from The Well-Tempered Clavier, I, BWV 854 Bach, W.F. Allegro Barber, Samuel “Galop” from Souvenirs, Op. 28 Bartok, Bela “Free Variations,” from Mikrokosmos, No. 140 “Whole Tone Scale,” from Mikrokosmos, No. 136 Beethoven, Ludwig von 15 Variationen mit Fuge, “Eroica,” Op. 35 Piano Sonata in G Major, Op. 31, No. 1, II Piano Sonata in G Major, Op. 31, No. 1, III Piano Sonata in G Major, Op. 49, No. 2 Piano Sonata in C Major, Op. 53, III Piano Sonata in G Major, Op. 79, II Piano Sonata in E Minor, Op. 90, II Russian Folk Dance Sonata in F Major for Violin and Piano, Op. 24, I Sonata in G, II, “Romance” Symphony No. 1 in C Major, Op. 21, IV Symphony No. 5 in C Minor, Op. 67, IV Benda, Georg Anton Sonatina No. 34 in D Major

510 555 79 261 510 509 414 372 509 79 148 412 81 558 553 554 320 320 375 82 371 412 444 262 319 374 80 414 263

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 573

Index of Musical Examples

Berg, Alban “Nacht,” from Seven Early Songs (1907) Brahms, Johannes Piano Sonata in F Minor, Op. 5, No. 3, II Variations on a Theme of Handel, Op. 24, Var. II Caldera, Antonio “Sebben crudele,” from La constanza in amor vince l’inganno Carissimi, Giacomo Vittoria, mio core! Carr, Benjamin Gavotte Chopin, Frédéric Mazurka, Op. 41, No. 1 Clementi, Muzio Sonatina in C Major, Op. 36, No. 1, I Sonatina in C Major, Op. 36, No. 3, II Copland, Aaron From Piano Variations (1930) Debussy, Claude “Bruyères,” from Préludes pour Piano, Book II “La fille aux cheveux de lin,” from Préludes pour Piano, Book I “Pagodes,” from Estampes “Passepied,” from Suite Bergamasque “Voiles,” from Préludes pour Piano, Book I Dvorak, Antonin Sonata in G Major for Violin and Piano, Op. 100, III Sonata in G Major for Violin and Piano, Op. 100, IV Fauré, Gabriel Mai, Op. 1, No. 2 Field, John Nocturne in D Minor, Hopk. No. 59A: 13 Folk Songs Amampondo (African) Basket Dance (Native American) British The Cherry Tree Carol (American, Kentucky) Ch’u T’ou Ko (Chinese) Die Alte Kashe ( Jewish) Farewell to the Ladies of Brisbane (Australian) Finnish French German The Green New Chum (Australian) Haliwa-Saponi Canoe Dance (Native American) Hotaru Koi ( Japanese) Hua Ku Ka No. 2 (Chinese)

573

555 373 320 202 83 202 510 147 79 556 508 262 510 508 556 372 442 443 264 512 517 147 508 514 515 513 202 82 146 513 516 514 514

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

574

13:34

Page 574

Index of Musical Examples

Kwaheri (African, Kenya) Latin American Mi Y’malel ( Jewish) Ngoma Kurila (African) Polish Ruchot Hayam ( Jewish) Russian Sa Huo K’ei Lei (Chinese) Scandinavian Serbian Song to the Four Directions (Native American) Swedish Tyrolian Where’s Your Licence? (Australian) Woza (African) Grieg, Edvard To Spring, Op. 43, No. 6 Gurlitt, Cornelius Little Flower, Op. 205, No. 7 Romantic Story Handel, Georg Frederick Aria from Rodelinda, Regina de Longobardi Haydn, Franz Josef Quadrille Piano Sonata in E-flat Major, Hob. XVI: 52, III String Quartet No. 80, Opus 76, No. 6, Hob. III: II Symphony No. 104, “London,” Hob. I: I Hook, James Minuet Ives, Charles The Cage Janác^ek, Leos^ “Moravian Dance,” from Suite, Op. 3 Kohler, Louis Echoing, Op. 218 Liszt, Franz Liebesträum No. 3 in A-flat Major, S. 541 From La Lugubre Gondola, S. 200, II MacDowell, Edward To a Wild Rose, Op. 51, No. 1 Mendelssohn, Felix Song without Words, Op. 30, No. 1 Mozart, W.A Piano Sonata in A Major, K. 331, I Piano Sonata in E-flat Major, K. 282, II Piano Sonata in F Major, K. 547a, I

512 146 516 511 145 516 201 515 145 509 517 202 201 513 512 262 373 145 413 149 203 80 413 79 554 262 81 443 556 263 199 319 147 203

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

13:34

Page 575

Index of Musical Examples

Sonata for Piano and Violin, K. 302, I Sonata for Piano and Violin, K. 377, II Symphony No. 35, “Haffner,” K. 385, I “Tuba Mirum,” from Requiem, K. 626 Pergolesi, Giovanni Se tu m’ami, se sospiri Prokofiev, Sergei “Gavotte,” from Symphony No. 1, “Classical,” Op. 25 Purcell, Henry “I Attempt from Love’s Sickness,” from The Indian Queen Raff, Joachim Scherzo, Op. 99, No. 3 Ravel, Maurice “Laideronnette, Impératrice des Pagodes,” from La Mère l’Oye Reinhold Waltz, Op. 39, No. 4 Scarlatti, Alessandro “Le Violette,” from Pierro e Demetrio Se Florindo e fedele Scarlatti, Domenico Minuet Minuet Sonata in C Major, Pastorale Schoenberg, Arnold “Tot,” from Three Songs, Op. 48 “Thema,” from Variations for Orchestra, Op. 31 Schubert, Franz “Erstarrung,” from Winterreise, D. 911 “Das Wandern,” from Die schöne Müllerin, D. 795 “Gute-nacht,” from Winterreise, D. 911 Impromptu in C Minor, Op. 90, No. 1, D. 899 Impromptu in G-flat Major, Op. 90, No. 3, D. 899 “Der Müller und der Bach,” from Die schöne Müllerin, D. 795 Sonata in A Minor, “Arpeggione,” D. 821 “Mit dem grünen Lautenband,” from Die schöne Müllerin, D. 795 Schumann, Robert An den Sonnenschein, Op. 36, No. 4 Aus den herbräischen Gesängen, Op. 25, No. 3 Studies of Caprices of Paganini, Op. 3, No. 4 “The Happy Farmer,” from Album for the Young, Op. 68, No. 10 Schytte, Ludwig Melody for Left Hand, Op. 108, No. 12 Scriabin, Alexander Prelude 4, from Five Preludes, Op. 15 Smetana, Bedrich “Stepping Dance,” from Czech Dances, T. 112:12

575

372 373 83 414 263 445 148 443 508 319 200 83 261 374 413 557 558 146 199 263 414 444 375 442 199 148 148 318 201 321 557 82

DAS02c.qxd

8/1/10

576

13:34

Page 576

Index of Musical Examples

Spindler Sonatina in C Major, Tarantella, Op. 157, No. 1, II Stradella, Allesandro Pietá, Signore! Tchaikovsky, Pyotr Ilyich Polka, Op. 39, No. 14 “The Doll’s Burial,” from Album for the Young, Op. 39, No. 7 Waltz, Op. 39, No. 8 Vaccai, Nicola Salti di terza Vivaldi, Antonio Violin Concerto in A Minor, Op. 3, No. 6, II Violin Concerto in A Minor, Op. 3, No. 6, III Wilton, C.H. Little Sonata, I

79 148 372 144 412 81 146 200 81